<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en-GB">
	<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Admin</id>
	<title>WCS - User contributions [en-gb]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Admin"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php/Special:Contributions/Admin"/>
	<updated>2026-05-08T09:41:05Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.8</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Monobook.css&amp;diff=9</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Monobook.css</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Monobook.css&amp;diff=9"/>
		<updated>2009-05-22T09:25:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New page: /* CSS placed here will affect users of the Monobook skin */ #ca-talk { display:none!important; }&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* CSS placed here will affect users of the Monobook skin */&lt;br /&gt;
#ca-talk { display:none!important; }&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=External_Data_Access&amp;diff=8</id>
		<title>External Data Access</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=External_Data_Access&amp;diff=8"/>
		<updated>2009-05-13T11:57:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New page: = Summary = The Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile database can be accessed for client reporting purposes using a Microsoft-standard ODBC data connection.    The suggested mechanism for accessing the ...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Summary =&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile database can be accessed for client reporting purposes using a Microsoft-standard ODBC data connection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The suggested mechanism for accessing the data is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a link database&lt;br /&gt;
# Create an ODBC Data Source&lt;br /&gt;
# Get the data from the ODBC data source with Microsoft Excel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Details =&lt;br /&gt;
== Set-up Requirements ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile system must be set up for your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must have access to the logging database. This document assumes that this has been created under a network drive X:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a Link Database ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to minimise the impact of the query on the Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile system, this should be performed on a link database. It is possible to access the database directly, but this is '''not''' recommended by OBS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new Access database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This database can be created locally (or your PC) if this is only being used by you, or can be created on any network machine (for example, the WCS Server) if used by many people.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case this has been called WCS-Reporting.mdb, created in My Documents&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose Get External Data/Link Tables from the File menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Link to your Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile logging database. This is normally in X:\Log.mdb or X:\Log1.mdb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Link the table ‘RDT Activity’&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save your new database by closing Access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create an ODBC Data Source ==&lt;br /&gt;
Choose Start/Settings/Control Panel/Administrative Tools/Data Sources (ODBC) from the Start menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is unavailable on your PC, you must have an Administrator user do this for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new System DSN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose ‘Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is unavailable on your PC, the Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC) must be installed on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ensure the Data Source Name is 8 characters or less.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select your data source using the ‘Select…’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click ‘OK’ to save the new data source&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Access the Data in Microsoft Excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that this is set up, you can access the Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile logging data from external sources. In this example, this is from Microsoft Excel, but could just as easily be from any ODBC-compliant reporting tool, such as Crystal Reports or Cognos Impromtu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Excel and create a new workbook. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose Import External Data/New Database Query from the Data menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, you may be prompted to install Microsoft Query for Excel. This may have to be completed by an Administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the WCS Reporting Data Source we set up earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the table to report. In this case, you will want the RDT Activity table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the data you want to filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the Sort Order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Return the data back into Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the cell into which you want the data to be loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the data is loaded in the form, you can filter and format the data in any way you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can refresh the data by choosing Refresh Data from Data menu or the menu shown when right-clicking on the cells.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sheet will retain its formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then save this worksheet for running in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Parameters ==&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters allow you to specify the data to be returned ‘on the fly’ by saying what you want it to match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose Import External Data/Edit Query from the Data menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keep hitting Next until you get to the end of the query, then click on the ‘View Data in Microsoft Query’ option, before clicking Finish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be taken into the Microsoft Query application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the Auto-Query button (!) is not pressed in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the item you wish to parameterise. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a prompt for the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hit Enter. You will be prompted for an employee code in a popup box. Enter one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can now exit Microsoft Query and return the data to the Excel spreadsheet by clicking the X in the top corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data is now selecting only the tasks relevant to employee IJ. Whenever you refresh the data, the Employee will be prompted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add multiple parameters to a query. Each will be prompted for in turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' You have full help on how Microsoft Query works, available using the Help button on the Query forms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
#: &lt;br /&gt;
#:: &lt;br /&gt;
#::: &lt;br /&gt;
#:::: &lt;br /&gt;
#::::: &lt;br /&gt;
#:::::: &lt;br /&gt;
#::::::: &lt;br /&gt;
#:::::::# '''WCS File Layout'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''RDT Activity table'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=Using_WCS_from_WMS&amp;diff=7</id>
		<title>Using WCS from WMS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=Using_WCS_from_WMS&amp;diff=7"/>
		<updated>2009-05-13T11:57:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New page: = System Overview = == Operation == As can be seen from the diagram, Calidus 3''pl'' runs on an RS6000, while Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile runs on a Windows NT PC in this implementation.   In th...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= System Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
== Operation ==&lt;br /&gt;
As can be seen from the diagram, Calidus 3''pl'' runs on an RS6000, while Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile runs on a Windows NT PC in this implementation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the diagram, Calidus 3''pl'' has been split into three areas. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The non-shaded area is the manual Calidus 3''pl'' system, being the screens and methods currently used to enter and confirm tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The wavy shaded area shows the portion of Calidus 3''pl'' that sends messages to the WMS interface. These are covered in great detail in following sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dotted area contains Calidus 3''pl'' RDT update programs that automatically do the work of the confirmation processes in manual Calidus 3''pl''. For example, one of these processes might confirm movements; another might confirm orders as picked. They work by receiving confirmation of tasks completed from Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile. Those messages (of tasks to be completed, and confirmation of tasks completed) are sent by the interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both systems have an interface; Calidus 3''pl''’s is referred to as the WMS interface, Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile’s as the WCS interface. Both need transmitters (to send their messages) and receivers to get messages back. As can be seen from the diagram, Calidus 3''pl''’s transmitter process, XMIT, sends messages to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile’s receiver program, WCS Server. When messages are being sent back to Calidus 3''pl'', Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile’s transmitter program, also WCS Server, sends messages to Calidus 3''pl''’s receiver process, RECV. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The third part of the interface is the merge process. In Calidus 3''pl'', the MERGE consists of many processes which we route messages to using the route message processor, or RMP. RMP routes the messages to the dotted area of the RDT update programs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, let’s look at the progression of tasks through this system from start to finish. For this example, we’ll use a simple housekeeping pallet movement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the task (move pallet 1 from A to B) is raised, the message is passed to the WMS Interface program, XMIT. XMIT passes to information to the WCS Server, which acknowledges receipt of the message. By acknowledging messages, we ensure that no tasks are lost between the two interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once WCS’s receiver has the message, merges the message to the database. This identifies the type of message (a pallet movement), and checks that everything is OK about the message’s contents. When satisfied of the contents, the task is put in the main WCS database, ready for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an RDT user requests a task, and they are to be allocated movement tasks, WCS will allocate the closest movement to that user’s location, or in priority order. In our example, this means they are given the movement we raised on Calidus 3''pl''. They are told to get the pallet 1 from location A and take it to location B, there scanning the check digits of the destination for confirmation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once they have completed the task, Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile sends a completion message to the Calidus 3''pl'' receiver program, RECV, which acknowledges receipt of the message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The receiver passes the message to RMP, which identifies the type of message, in our example, a movement completion message. The message is then routed to the correct RDT update process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT update process examines the contents of the message for validity, and then updates all the Calidus 3''pl'' data files that you would expect if it was confirmed manually in the Pallet Move Confirmation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= RDT Control Processes =&lt;br /&gt;
== Menus ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The menu is normally located on the top flexible menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Parameters ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to send RDT messages or tasks to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile, the Calidus 3''pl'' system must be informed that the Interface to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile is present. This is enabled via the ‘Interface Flag’ on system parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering 99 at the action prompt allows you identify the default locations required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Build up location 3 is the default putaway location, if the putaway algorithm finds no locations. Location 6 is a default marshalling lane, used by pick list and allocation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owner parameters ==&lt;br /&gt;
An Interface flag also exists per Owner or Stockist. With this flag, we are able to determine whether, even if the warehouse allows RDT operations, the owner allows RDT operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all ways, this bank of screens operates in the same way as the System parameters screens, described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== RDT Start/Stop Screen ==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is the major control screen for RDTs in Calidus 3''pl''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each line controls not only the running of the update process in Calidus 3''pl'', but also the availability of the functions to standard Calidus 3''pl'' processing. So, for example, if the Pallet Receipt Update availability flag is ‘Y’, you have the ability to send receipt preadvice messages to WCS. If it is ‘N’, you can’t send those messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of the availability flags in the system will be explained for each sending process described in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Processes can be started or stopped by entering the id number of the appropriate line, then selecting START or STOP from the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In both of these cases, if you do not want to stop or start the process, choose CONTINUE from the selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other procedures can be used from the action prompt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Use ‘NORM’ – This procedure checks the operating system to see if the processes are running or stopped, then updates or normalises the screen data so that it is accurate. This procedure is run on first entering the screen, and should be manually run at regular intervals whilst in the screen, to ensure the most accurate depiction of the system is displayed at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use ‘F’ – The standard Find procedure gets the data from the file again. This will show if the update processes have changed the file. If these processes stop at any time, they will update this file to show that they have been stopped. In some cases, if these processes have changed the data, and you have not used ‘F’ or ‘NORM’, the screen may tell you to re-find the data to pick up the changes. This is normal.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use ‘MSG’ – This procedure starts the interface processes if they are stopped, or stops them if they are started.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use ‘STOP’ – This procedure stops all running update processes. It will not stop the interface processes – use ‘MSG’ for this.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use ‘START’ This procedure starts all stopped update processes. It will not start the interface processes – use ‘MSG’ for this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The use of this screen should be limited to System Administrators only.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= SENDING DATA =&lt;br /&gt;
== Standing Data tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
See the C3PL-M Setup guide, for details of how this data is used in the Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Various data tables on Calidus 3''pl'' need to be sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile. These tables are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Employees&lt;br /&gt;
* Truck Types&lt;br /&gt;
* Pallet Types&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Types&lt;br /&gt;
* Reason Codes&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt Types&lt;br /&gt;
* Aisles Status/Aisles&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maintenance screens for these tables can be found (by default) on the Warehouse maintenance menu. The exception to this is the Stock Maintenance screen, normally found on the Stock menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To perform an initial send of the data to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile, type ‘SEND’ at the action prompt of the appropriate maintenance screen. If the interface flag on system parameters is set, the whole file will be sent. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, during normal use of the screens, any added or deleted data is sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile, to keep the files accurate. Simply use the screen as normal, and the data will be sent, as long as the interface flag is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preadvices ==&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the preadvice as normal, either with or without pallet details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all details have been entered, type ‘SEND’ at the action prompt on the main preadvice screen. Tasks per pallet will be sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile. You can only send preadvice records this way if the availability flag of the Pallet Receipt Update process is set to ‘Y’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sending the preadvices to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile need only be done this way if the Goods had not been preadvised via EDI. In this process, all messages will be automatically sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile on receipt of the EDI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once pallets have been received on Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile and sent back to Calidus 3''pl'' they will automatically be updated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' In unexpected scenarios (e.g. unexpectedly received pallets) the GR will NOT be automatically confirmed as received. The pallets, which have processed correctly, will have been confirmed but no action will have been taken on other pallets. You will still be able to put the correctly processed pallets away. In order to confirm the GRN fully, you must access the GR Confirmation screen and type ‘CONF’ at the prompt. Until this action is taken, the GRN will continue to appear on diagnostic reports. See section  for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Putaways ==&lt;br /&gt;
When the Goods Receipt has been processed on Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile, update messages are sent back to Calidus 3''pl''. The Pallet Receipt Update program, controlled by the RDT Start/Stop screen processes these. When the program processes the receipt messages, it will generate a putaway location for the pallet automatically. This is sent through to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile as a putaway task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a location cannot be found for the pallet, the putaway location will default to the third build-up location on system parameters, the Q/A location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If, however, you have the availability flag of the Pallet Receipt Update process set to ‘N’ and the flag for Movement/Putaway Update process set to ‘Y’, you can send putaway messages a different way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the flags are set up this way, preadvice messages can’t be sent to WCS, but putaway messages can. When you have created the goods receipt in Calidus 3''pl'', enter locations as normal in Goods receipt confirmation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When ‘CONF’ is typed, the receipt is confirmed, and then putaway messages are sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile, with the locations that you specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the putaway messages have been processed, the pallets will be available in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pallet Moves ==&lt;br /&gt;
Pallet movements sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile are processed in almost exactly the same way as normal. Pallet movements are raised via the Pallet Movement Request screen, and ‘CONF’ is typed as normal. In the Ticket Print screen, you will be prompted for two extra items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not want to print the move ticket, enter ‘N’ at the appropriate prompt. You must then enter a priority for the messages. This priority will indicate how quickly the messages are processed in Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile. The values range from 2 (the highest) to 9 (the lowest).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this entry, the request is processed as normal, but with movement messages being sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Replens ==&lt;br /&gt;
Replenishments are processed in the same way as pallet movements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Picks ==&lt;br /&gt;
Pick tasks are sent to the RDTs at the normal pick list stage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If allocation has been set up to print the pick lists at the same time, you will be prompted to enter extra parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Marshalling location is the lane to which you wish the picked pallets to go. If one is not entered, the system will default the location to the fourth build up location in the system parameters screen. The RDT priority affects how quickly the pick tasks will be allocated to a picker. As with other RDT process priorities, this can be set from 2 to 9, 2 being the highest priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When allocation and pick list is completed, all identified pick tasks will be sent to the RDTs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you pick list by a separate process in the menus, you will be prompted to enter the extra parameters at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Marshalling location is the lane to which you wish the picked pallets to go. The RDT priority affects how quickly the pick tasks will be allocated to a picker. As with other RDT process priorities, this can be set from 2 to 9, 2 being the highest priority.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When pick list is completed, all identified pick tasks will be sent to the RDTs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pick Modifications ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have short-picked an item or the pickers have not found some pallets, these tasks will be sent back to Calidus 3''pl'', and will reduce the amount picked. The shortfall must be appended onto the order. This is achieved by adding lines at pick confirmation, but without confirming the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, find the order in the Pick confirmation by route/load/order screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required page of the order. You will be taken to the confirm screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, append lines to the order as normal, but do not confirm the page. No updating is required. The appended pick task will be sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile for processing. When completed, the task will be returned and updated automatically by Calidus 3''pl''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stock Check ==&lt;br /&gt;
Generate the stock check cycle as normal in the generation screen. For messages to be sent to Calidus 3''pl''-Mobile, the interface flag (either from owner or system parameters) must be set, and the stock check availability flag and owner check flags must also be set in the RDT start/stop screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cycle will either be a full stock check or a partial stock check. If neither, the stock check will be assumed to be a partial, or pre-advised, check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once stock details have been checked on the RDTs, the information is sent back to Calidus 3''pl'' and updated into the stock take count input screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the data is checked for consistency, the cycle can be updated, using the stock take update screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good counts should be confirmed. If unsure about the counts, the cycle can be rejected or partially confirmed. In a partial confirmation, any records that were correct are confirmed, and any with modifications are left on the stock cycle. These will then be re-sent to the RDTs, so that they may be checked again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Receiving Procedures =&lt;br /&gt;
== WCS Exceptions Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are prompted to choose a date range (start and end) for selection. This will default to today’s date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The error type allows you to choose from a range of message levels:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Informational (type ‘I’) – Some processes write away messages to the report, showing successful completion of update. These are informational messages.&lt;br /&gt;
* Warning (type ‘W’) – Warnings show data that may need to be fixed, but the line has been updated anyway.&lt;br /&gt;
* Error (type ‘E’) – Errors show records that cannot be updated. The reason will be shown in the description. Data with errors must be entered and updated manually through the normal manual update screens.&lt;br /&gt;
* All (type ‘A’) – All of the above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message types allow you to choose which processes’ messages you want to see on the report. A full list will be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last two parameters control the clear-down of the RDT exception data file. This should be done on a regular basis. By default, no clear-down is done. If you choose to do the clear-down, you are prompted to enter a date. All data before this data will be deleted. Take care using this function as, once deleted, the exceptions data cannot be recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diagnostics processes ==&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the above report, several diagnostics reports exist that will aid in identifying possible problems:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For GRNs:&lt;br /&gt;
* GRN’s not putaway confirmed&lt;br /&gt;
* GR Discrepancies Report&lt;br /&gt;
* GRN’s advised not confirmed&lt;br /&gt;
* For Orders:&lt;br /&gt;
* Order (status) report&lt;br /&gt;
* Unconfirmed Orders&lt;br /&gt;
* Unconfirmed Pick Pages Report &lt;br /&gt;
* For Moves:&lt;br /&gt;
* Unconfirmed Movements&lt;br /&gt;
* Outstanding Movements Report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Various enquiries exist in the system, which will also aid identification:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* All stock movements enquiries&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Pallet ID Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
* Pallet Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=RDT_Functionality&amp;diff=6</id>
		<title>RDT Functionality</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=RDT_Functionality&amp;diff=6"/>
		<updated>2009-05-13T11:56:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New page: = RDT Concept = The main Calidus 3PL system controls the overall data for the system.  Where warehouse movements and other truck-based tasks must be controlled, the manual system usually p...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= RDT Concept =&lt;br /&gt;
The main Calidus 3PL system controls the overall data for the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where warehouse movements and other truck-based tasks must be controlled, the manual system usually produces a paper-based instruction or set of instructions for the fork-list truck drivers to complete. When work is completed, the system has the data from the sheets entered in to it and the work is confirmed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT system replaces the paper-based system, by sending tasks to the RDT system, then allocating the tasks to trucks as and when they require them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where paper is used to issue instructions, the RDT will have instructions sent from WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system created for Calidus 3PL integrates to the main system seamlessly. The current Calidus 3PL update screens (that the RDT system replaces) can be used as backup processes, in the event of system failure. The paper-based system can also be run in parallel with the RDT system for further security. Messages can be resent both from Calidus 3PL and from the RDT system, allowing for recovery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WCS Structure =&lt;br /&gt;
The OBS RDT system has been created using relatively simple programming methods. Where code is required, this is written in Visual Basic. Where connectivity is required (both wireless and wired), third party software has been bought as programming libraries for VB, for example Wavelink for the wireless LAN. These programming modules have allowed us to put together a relatively simple solution to the communications issues, as shown in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As can be seen, Wavelink controls all the communication to the RDTs and each RDT has its own control program, which Wavelink starts, whenever an RDT attempts to communicate with it. This application is written by OBS and provides the screen layouts and validation that the RDT users meet during a session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS Server controls all communications to and from the WMS, receiving outstanding tasks and sending back completed ones. It also accesses its storage database on request from the RDT control applications, which request work. All messages pass through the server at some point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the WMS, the interface also has a generic sender and a receiver, which must be running. They and the WCS interface communicate via socket communication using TCP/IP or via Oracle Advanced Queues. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The transmitter picks up messages from the portion of the Calidus 3PL system that has been written to send messages. These messages are packaged and sent to the socket or queue. The WCS interface picks these messages up and stores them on its task database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The receiver picks messages up from the socket, validates them to some degree and then passes the messages to a third program, the RMP, or Route Message Processor (In the Oracle system, this is handled by the queues). This is specific to our Calidus 3PL system (as opposed to the other two that can be used generically), as the messages are interrogated to find what type of message they are, then routed to the correct processing program. These processing programs then transfer the data to the main Calidus 3PL database, in the same way that the manual screens do.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PC Requirements ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS has been written to make the most of the available memory and processing power of the PC. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hardware Requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Best processor (normally single processor only)&lt;br /&gt;
* 256 Mb RAM min (512 Mb plus recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
* 6 Gb disk space min (20Gb over multiple disks recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows 2003/2000/XP/NT4 (Server preferred)&lt;br /&gt;
* CD-ROM&lt;br /&gt;
* 56K Modem and direct telephone line, or access to PC WAN via dial-up&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Software Requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
* PC Anywhere (latest version) or other Remote control software plus file transfer capabilities. OBS recommend Remote Desktop Connection with FTP Server capability.&lt;br /&gt;
* Wavelink StudioCOM (latest version 3.7) by Wavelink – plus licenses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Wavelink SNC24 (latest version 4) by Wavelink. (Only required if monitoring/administration of the wireless LAN is required).&lt;br /&gt;
* Wavelink Avalanche by Wavelink (Only required if the Wavelink client is to not already installed on the RDTs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= RDT Functionality =&lt;br /&gt;
== RDT Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
When users connect to the RDT system through their RDTs, they will be required to log in (see flow chart ). This login structure requires them to specify a Warehouse (a default company is assigned to them), a user ID, and a truck type. This information allows the WCS to decide on the information the RDT user is assigned during his working shift. The Employee code entered at log-on can only be used one at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user may also choose to enter a default owner. This is used whenever the system prompts the user to enter an owner code. A description of what the owner is used for is provided in section .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the warehouse chosen, the user may be prompted to enter two flags; bulk and system-directed. The first relates to whether the user is working in a narrow aisle environment (Y), or wide area (N). The second flag, system-directed, controls whether the dual cycling menu options appear for a user (Y).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged in to the system, the user will be shown a main menu of available functions. The available functions can be set up against each individual user in the WCS, as can be seen in section .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A fuller description of what these parameters can be set to, and their function, can be found in another document, referenced as item Error: Reference source not found in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Function keys ==&lt;br /&gt;
The user is provided with help, showing them any special key presses that have an effect in the current module. A key can be pressed in some modules to display additional information requires by the user. The information displayed is bespoke to the client. Function keys are standardised throughout the RDT system, consisting of:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* F1- Confirm Key&lt;br /&gt;
* F2- Amend Key&lt;br /&gt;
* F3- Add Key&lt;br /&gt;
* F4- Error Key&lt;br /&gt;
* F5- Special/Zero Key&lt;br /&gt;
* F7- Enquiries menu&lt;br /&gt;
* F8- Additional Information Key&lt;br /&gt;
* F9- Help Key&lt;br /&gt;
* F10- Return to Main Menu Key&lt;br /&gt;
* CLEAR- Backup key&lt;br /&gt;
* CRSRUP- Previous Key&lt;br /&gt;
* CRSRDN- Next Key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This approach of standardised function keys gives the users familiarity with the operation of each module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-part movements ==&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever a movement task is raised in the system, if only certain truck types can access certain locations, the system must utilise P&amp;amp;D location. This type of operation leads to multi-part movements, consisting of several stages, numbered by the WCS for simplicity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| # &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| Source&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Destination&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| # &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| Source&lt;br /&gt;
| Interim1&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| # &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| Source&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Interim2&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| # &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Interim1&lt;br /&gt;
| Interim2&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| # &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Interim1&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Destination&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| # &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Interim2&lt;br /&gt;
| Destination&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
== Movements by Truck Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
Location types (and their associated truck types) are used in nearly every enquiry in the WCS. Every task, to move a pallet from one point to another, defines which location type the associated location is. The data received from the WMS defines which truck types are allowed access to that particular location. This, coupled with the truck type the RDT user enters at log-on, defines where exactly that user is allowed to operate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS is the location type, with all associated truck types, along with which company and warehouse the types are associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, our warehouse contains five areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt Bays (REC)&lt;br /&gt;
* Marshalling/Despatch Bays (MAR)&lt;br /&gt;
* High Bay Narrow Aisle (NA)&lt;br /&gt;
* Low Bay bulk storage (BLK)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pick Faces (PIC)&lt;br /&gt;
* P&amp;amp;D locations (PND)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have four truck types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Truck Type (Code)'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Tasks to be done'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Reach Truck (RT) &lt;br /&gt;
| Moving pallets around in Low Bay; Replenishing pick faces; picking full pallets from low bay; put away pallets to Low Bay&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Counter-balance (CB)&lt;br /&gt;
| Taking pallets from P&amp;amp;D locations to Marshalling; put pallets on to P&amp;amp;D for High Bay putaway&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picker hand cart (PK)&lt;br /&gt;
| Picking from pick faces and taking to marshalling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Narrow Aisle truck (NA)&lt;br /&gt;
| Moving full pallets around in High Bay&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, we set up location types as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Loc Type&lt;br /&gt;
! Trucks Allowed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| REC&lt;br /&gt;
| RT, CB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MAR&lt;br /&gt;
| RT, CB, PK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NA&lt;br /&gt;
| NA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| BLK&lt;br /&gt;
| RT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PIC&lt;br /&gt;
| RT, PK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PND&lt;br /&gt;
| CB, NA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
This set-up allows all trucks access to the location types required to do their jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The set-up can be modified to allow for drivers who only have to do one job (e.g. a variant of RT that can only pick pallets to marshalling – it can’t put them away, or a truck that can only do replenishments). It can also be modified to take into account certain restrictions on truck height (for example, reach trucks that can only reach 5, 6 or 7 levels high).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Locations and Check Digits Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
Check digits can be enabled or disabled from the WCS Maintenance program. This gives the functionality that the WCS can be used in warehouses without the expenditure of new location labels, but with a slight loss of accuracy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The options available are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Location – the user is prompted to scan or enter the location again.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check Digit – the user is prompted to scan or enter the check digits associated with the location.&lt;br /&gt;
* Combo – the user is prompted to scan a barcode at confirmation. If the barcode is scanned, the program expects the barcode to contain the location code. If data is keyed in, the program expects that the data keyed will be the check digits of the location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combo check gives the most functionality, as the barcodes can be used to scan locations for when location entry is required (for example, in Ad Hoc Pallet Moves, and repositioning pallet moves).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All validation types described above depend on the location labels the warehouse has – if no barcodes are available to be scanned, then the program will still prompt, but manual entry of the check digits is accepted instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The check digits prompted for depend on the data set up in the WMS – if check digits are enabled on some locations but not others, locations without check digits are still prompted, but the program will accept a blank entry (keying RETURN over the field). Additionally, if check digits are entered for locations in the WMS, but Check Digit validation is not enabled in the WMS, the WCS can still check entry of check digits, but the WMS will not require the users to enter them at manual confirmation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pallet Identification ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to identify that the user has found the correct pallet, most of the RDT modules will prompt for a pallet ID. This is normally a unique identifier for the pallet within the warehouse. The WMS can support two types of pallet identifier, the system pallet ID and a customer’s pallet ID (the pallet ID of the pallet in any previous computer systems). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS supports the use of either of these pallet Ids to identify a pallet. The WCS can also support identifying pallets by neither of these, but simply by location and stock code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P&amp;amp;D processing ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS controls P&amp;amp;D locations for multi-part moves (section ) in several ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
P&amp;amp;D locations can be assigned to inbound and outbound movements within an aisle in the WMS and the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several different types of P&amp;amp;D location used by the WCS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sequential – FIFO and LIFO P&amp;amp;Ds&lt;br /&gt;
* Random – where each pallet is accessible at any time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The P&amp;amp;D locations can also be listed as having limited or unlimited storage space for pallets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system can cope with the same P&amp;amp;D location used for both in and out, for any of the above types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to cope with multiple face opportunities, there are two further parameters on the aisle:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OPP AISLE – if this is populated, the aisle (and the opposite aisle) are treated as faces of the same aisle. When location efficiency is being used, all moves for this aisle and the opposite aisle are treated as from the same aisle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SPLIT FACES? – If this flag is set, and there is no OPP AISLE, the faces are split ODD and EVEN. If the OPP AISLE flag is set, it should be split AISLE and OPP AISLE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves on P&amp;amp;Ds acquire the priority of any tasks behind them. This means that any high-priority pallet arriving on a P&amp;amp;D will bump the priority of any pallets before it, allowing the high priority move to get out of the racking quicker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When moving pallets out of NA areas, the system allows for limited P&amp;amp;D space. E.g. when there are 7 high priority outbound moves from an aisle, and only room for 3 pallets at P&amp;amp;D out, only 3 can be done before the P&amp;amp;D must be cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If, during Narrow Aisle Dual Cycling, a pallet is found on an inbound P&amp;amp;D for which there are no movements to the P&amp;amp;D’s aisle, the system will ask the operator to confirm the pallet number by re-scanning it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pallet is number is confirmed, the system will check to see if there are any other tasks for that pallet from any other locations in the warehouse that aren’t currently being performed by another user. If there are, the system will generate a task to move the pallet from the current location to the location from which the existing task will take the pallet from. If the move generated is to a P&amp;amp;D that is not blocked and the operator’s truck is allowed access to, the movement is shown on the RDT. If not, an error message is shown on the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An exception will be logged with the comment “Pallet P&amp;amp;D Error” when this occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Barcode support ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS supports as standard the following barcode types to be scanned for fields:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* EAN-13&lt;br /&gt;
* EAN-8&lt;br /&gt;
* CODE-128&lt;br /&gt;
* CODE-39&lt;br /&gt;
* CODE I25&lt;br /&gt;
* UCC/EAN-128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further barcode types can be supported, but are sometimes limited by the barcode scanner and software. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The UCC/EAN-128 standard is applied in a generic fashion for the most common data items. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the RDT Receipt module allows the user to scan UCC/EAN-128 barcodes with multiple data items in a single scan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS holds an optional table of stock codes, against which it can hold alternative barcodes for the stock. If this table is populated, the WCS will recognise all barcodes associated to the stock code, whenever a stock code entry is required. An example of this means that EAN barcodes for sales, distribution or consumer units may be scanned for each stock code in place of entering the system stock code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS Stock Barcodes table is maintained from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multiple UOM Processing ==&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled (in the WMS and WCS), the WCS is capable of entering either a simple Cases value, or Cases and Units. In this document, the entry of either of these values is referenced as Quantity entry. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled and the UOM factor between cases and units is greater than 1, the WCS will prompt the user to enter both a cases and units value. These two values are delimited by a forward slash (‘/’), for ease of recognition. The user will be prompted first for the case count, then the unit count. The only exception here is when the user is picking units only from a unit pick face. The user will then only be prompted for a unit value, the case value defaulting to zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the systems are not enabled for multiple UOM entry, or the stock being actioned has a UOM factor of 1 (i.e. 1 case = 1 unit), the WCS will only prompt for a case count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever the values entered on the RDT, the quantities sent back to the WMS will be the conglomerated values (cases, multiplied by the UOM factor, plus the number of units).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owner Restrictions ==&lt;br /&gt;
When logging on to the RDT, the user is prompted to enter an Owner Code. This owner can control the work that a user is allowed to perform in the warehouse. If a user is set that way, they are known as a restrictive owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The owner entered at log-on is part of the selection criteria for the WCS task retrieval. (E.g. if the user logs on as 174, they can only do tasks for owner 174). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the owner selected has no restrictions, the user entering the owner will only be restricted to those owners without the flag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Owner&lt;br /&gt;
! Restricted Flag&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AAA&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| BBB&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| CCC&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| DDD&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| EEE&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If the user logs in as BBB, they will only get tasks for BBB&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user logs in as CCC, they will only get tasks for CCC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user logs in as AAA, they can get tasks for AAA, DDD or EEE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tasks restricted in this way will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
* Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
* Pallet Movements/Replenishments&lt;br /&gt;
* Picks (Full- and Part pallet)&lt;br /&gt;
* Truck Moves/Dual cycling (a combination of all full-pallet movements in the WCS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user is restrictive, it can have settings against it in the WCS. This means that restrictive owners (i.e. owners with their own workforce) can operate in a different way to those that are not restrictive. These owners use the warehouse defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Movement Exceptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
During the processing of some tasks – Putaway, Pallet Moves and Ad Hoc Pallet Moves – the RDT may give some options to the user, to allow them to reflect actions that they took, if they were not what the WCS expected them to do. These are called Movement Exceptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If the warehouse is marked as a Block Stack warehouse within WCS, there is another exception called Exchange Pallet. This is covered in great detail in section .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition ===&lt;br /&gt;
In standard pallet movements and putaways, the user can be optionally offered the ability to reposition the pallet to a new destination. This will reflect the new destination in the WMS when completed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user is unable to position the pallet in the suggested location because the aisle is blocked or the location is otherwise inaccessible, the user will have the ability to choose a new location for the pallet, by pressing F4 to reposition the pallet. This option can be password-protected for those users who are given the option. It is intended that this password would be known only to the shift supervisors and as such the user will have to ask the supervisors to authorise the reposition. The RDT will request the user to find a new empty location for the pallet. They will also be asked to confirm the check-digits of the location, if required. Should the location be available, the user will be allowed to use this location. When the task is completed, this information is sent back to the WMS, where the putaway will be confirmed into the new location. The WCS will also create an exception (visible in WCS Maintenance) showing the location the pallet was originally intended for, for information purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Extended Reposition Validation ===&lt;br /&gt;
When repositioning pallets, the WCS can check that the locations are valid in two ways. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard way is for the WCS to check only that the location exists and validate the check digits entered by the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be modified so that the WCS validates in exactly the same way as the WMS, in that it checks that the location availability, the pallet type, number of pallets, bonded status, multi-pallet validation, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cancellation ===&lt;br /&gt;
For some types of pallet movements, the user can be optionally offered the ability to cancel the movement. This returns the pallet to the original source location on the WMS. This is only offered at the source location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multi-Pallet Locations ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WMS contains functionality relating to multi-deep locations, which can be used to handle normal multi-deep locations, block stack locations, drive-in locations, etc - any location where pallets are stored where it is sometimes difficult to locate the exact pallet you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WMS controls pallets moving in these locations during putaway, and can ensure than only pallets of similar properties are held in each location, by a combination of some or all of the following criteria:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Product Code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Batch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manufacture Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sell-by date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
GRN number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should pallets be received with different criteria than those marked for validation against the multi-deep location, they will not be located within that location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WMS can also manage that the locations be left marked as full, until all of the pallets within a particular location have been moved out, ensuring that newer stock is not positioned in the location before the old stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moving pallets into the multi-deep locations pose no problems for the WCS, as the movements are identical to moves into other, fully-accessible locations. The problems occur whenever pallets are removed from the location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever the WMS says that something should be done (for example, picking), the pallets being moved are 'hard allocated' to the task. This doesn't change. What does happen is that the user is given the opportunity to exchange the pallet for another one, as long as it matches some criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is given a task to complete from a multi-pallet location, they are sent to the location by the normal manner and asked to confirm the location. Once confirmed, the RDT will ask them to confirm the pallet being picked. At this point, the user is able to press a function key to exchange the pallet for another in that location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This exchange is done by two methods:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Task Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pallet Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Task Exchange ===&lt;br /&gt;
The first thing that the WCS does is check to see if there is an outstanding task available within the WCS for the pallet that you have scanned. If there is, the WCS seamlessly instructs the user to complete this task first. So, if this was for another order, the RDT would instruct the user to pick this pallet for the other order first, and then send them back to the same location to try to pick their pallet again. The option for exchange pallet is available again at this point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pallet Exchange ===&lt;br /&gt;
Should there be no task available for the user to exchange to, the WCS will ask the WMS to validate the pallet scanned as the replacement pallet, to ensure that the pallet can be exchanged. This checks various details such as whether the pallet is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allocated to another order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Already moving to another location&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under stock take.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is the case, the pallet is not exchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The location must be marked as a multi-deep location. If not, no exchange is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process also validates the sell-by date and manufacture date, depending on the set-up of the stock within the WMS. However, it is assumed that the validation against the location has ensured that the pallets within the location are already compatible for exchange, as the location will have validated this when the pallets were put in the location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pallet passes the validation, the RDT user is allowed to continue the task, taking the pallet requested instead. The WMS will hold the new pallet during this exchange manoeuvre. When the task is completed, the WMS will complete the task and formalise the exchange:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original pallet will be released for further allocation to tasks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new pallet will have been actioned as if it was the original pallet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The audit trail (and all supporting files) will be maintained.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Options Available ===&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to allow replenishment movements of Pick Faces to be exchanged for another pallet. The checking on the pallet is more stringent than before, checking such things as total available quantity as well as others. In this instance, the exchange is reflected not only on the replenishment movement itself, but on all the orders picking from that pallet. So, the WMS changes the pallet, and re-sends all the pick tasks associated to that pallet at the point of exchange - all the old picks are cancelled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labelling ==&lt;br /&gt;
In certain modules (e.g. Goods Receipt, Picking), the WCS can be set up to print labels. This is done by merging the information of the task being processed (e.g. the current pick task) with a defined format. The items that can be merged are being expanded all the time and are referenced by defined field names in the modules. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in picking, there is a defined field called “MarshLoc”. This is the defined marshalling location for the current pick task. A plain text label template for the despatch label may look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;TEMPLATE&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC Pick Label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marshalling Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{MarshLoc}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/TEMPLATE&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the task in question has a marshalling location of “MAR01A”, the WCS would merge the template and the data to produce a single label similar to the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC Pick Label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Marshalling Location:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAR01A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The templates can be as complex or simple as required. So, if templates are created in ZPL2 label printer formatting, the WCS will still merge the data at the point requested i.e. the field name in curly brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each RDT modules allowing label printing have a section showing the fields currently allowable on labels printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A full discussion around the setting up of printers for use with the WCS can be found in the WCS Setup Guide, referenced as item Error: Reference source not found in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= GENERIC RDT Modules =&lt;br /&gt;
== Goods Receipt ==&lt;br /&gt;
This module replaces the Goods Receipt Confirmation screen on the manual system, or can be used to complement manual (paper-based) receiving.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preadvices are entered manually in the WMS Goods Receipt Preadvice screen or received through EDI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Messages are sent to WCS either from the GR Preadvice screen at the request of a user or automatically from the incoming EDI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The preadvice to RDTs can be to a stock level, or to a pallet level, depending on how much detail was entered on the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flow-charts .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is prompted to enter the GRN number from the manual system. This matches to a Preadvice on the WCS. A flag controls whether the user can identify receipts from the Advice Note number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can then conditionally be prompted for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A default pallet type used for all pallets during that receipt session&lt;br /&gt;
* A receiving location&lt;br /&gt;
* A receipt type (reflected on the WMS)&lt;br /&gt;
* Whether the user wishes to see the ultimate destination location when each pallet is received&lt;br /&gt;
* Printer information, if the WCS is printing labels to wireless printers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user then enters all the required information per pallet received. This information varies on the set-up of the WCS, but can include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pallet ID (can by system-generated)&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer’s pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
* Stockist code&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock code&lt;br /&gt;
* Batch&lt;br /&gt;
* Manufacture and sell-by dates&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantities (Including Measure Quantity functionality)&lt;br /&gt;
* Weights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The majority of this information could be barcoded on the label, and therefore the WCS allows the user to scan barcodes for each item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if the label contains a barcode with multiple items of information in it (in this case, UCC/EAN-128 barcodes), the WCS can optionally prompt the user to scan these barcodes first. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The items extracted from the barcode can be set up against the warehouse or owner. Only those items actually required by the stock code will be extracted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pallets being received can be identified via system pallet ID, customer pallet ID or stock code. For the Blind goods receipt module, Stock code is the identifying key and will be scanned first. For Check goods receipts, the Customer Pallet ID is the identifying key. If the data is preadvised to a pallet level, all of the items above can be defaulted from the preadvice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The level of validation performed by the WCS on the received stock can be modified extensively, and can include checks on additional stock items, total stock quantity and standard pallet quantities, with four levels of validation (Ignore, Informational message, Supervisor Override, Error).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ignore – No check is made.&lt;br /&gt;
* Informational message – a check is made and a warning is issued. The user is allowed to continue receiving the pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
* Error - a check is made and a warning is issued. The user is not allowed to continue receiving the pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
* Supervisor Override - a check is made and a warning is issued. The user must obtain authorisation from a supervisor before they are allowed to continue. The supervisor must enter their employee code and password on the terminal as this authorisation. This authorisation is logged on WCS’s Exception table, for auditing purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each pallet entered generates a putaway message to the RDT and updates the system with the required information, in the form required by the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A damaged quantity and reason can also be entered against a pallet. This will create a separate pallet for the damaged stock, and can optionally suggest a damages location for the stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that RDT Goods Receipt might be slower than manual entry. This is because of the keying of data required on the RDT. If the pallets are labelled with barcodes before receipt and preadvised data is correct, this can speed up. The WCS can be set up in such a way that goods receipts are controlled via the normal WMS screens, with putaways controlled via the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pallet Identification and Labelling ==&lt;br /&gt;
A problem within most warehouses is the ability to label pallets effectively – if the receipt process is perfect, but the labelling process is manual, errors will occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standard WMS processing requires the user to print out the pallet labels after the pallets have been entered into the system, then requiring the user to match the label to the pallet received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below are some processes which can be used to help the issue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Use Customer’s Pallet Labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes the pallets received by the warehouse do not require re-configuration and are already labelled from the customer’s systems. The WCS can be configured to capture this Customer’s Pallet ID at receipt stage. This can then be used as the WCS task identifier when moving pallets around the warehouse or picking them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCS Receipt Label ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS can print pallet labels to a wireless printer. The label is printed directly as the pallet is received and the label placed onto the pallet before the user moves on to receiving the next pallet. This reduces the danger of pallets being incorrectly labelled. Standard formats exist for receipt labelling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note: '''Wireless label printers may require a different pallet label to be programmed, as the programming languages of the different types of label printer vary. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note: '''Wireless label printers are expensive and may constitute a reason for not printing from the WCS. However, this process could be used in conjunction with fixed printers in the receiving area, although the benefit of staying with the pallet whilst labelling is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If labelling pallets through the WCS, the following items can currently be used on the produced pallet label:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Field'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Description'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| StockCode&lt;br /&gt;
| Received stock on pallet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| CustBatch&lt;br /&gt;
| Received Batch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| SysDate&lt;br /&gt;
| Date Received&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Qty&lt;br /&gt;
| Received quantity of stock on pallet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| SPID&lt;br /&gt;
| System Pallet ID &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| SellByDate&lt;br /&gt;
| Received Sell-by Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ManuDate&lt;br /&gt;
| Received Manufacture Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WMSRot&lt;br /&gt;
| WMS Rotation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== WMS Receipt Label ===&lt;br /&gt;
Automatically produce label to defined printer, using a version of the format that already exists within WMS. The user would then immediately go to the printer upon receiving the pallet, and pick up their label. They would then take it back to the pallet they had just received, and label it. '''Note: '''A version of the WMS label print may need to be created, to be run automatically from the WMS RF update program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' There is some room for error in this process, as the user must get the label from a common printer and leave the pallet behind. The defined printer would be made common for the owner, meaning that several people could be printing to the same printer at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pre-label ===&lt;br /&gt;
A pre-printed roll of labels could be used, showing a unique identifier on each small label. Whenever a user receives a pallet, the first actions they take are to place one of these small unique labels on the pallet and scan that into the RDT during receipt. This will be held as the Customer’s Pallet ID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the ID is being used solely for the WCS identifier, and no further pallet label is required, the process can stop here. Should a more detailed label be required, labels can then be produced either automatically from WCS or produced at the end of receiving for all the pallets, directly from the normal WMS goods receipt screens. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may then be necessary to have WMS label prints that show the Customer’s pallet ID (the place the WMS stores the data) as a barcode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user would then use the Customer’s pallet ID on the labels retrieved to match against the pre-labelled pallets. This would reduce the checking required in labelling pallets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' The normal system pallet ID or the customer’s pallet ID could be used to identify the stock in the warehouse in the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' There would be a cost overhead in using the pre-printed roll of unique labels, plus the risk of using an identifier that has been used before – the system would not then allow receipt of the pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' The benefit of a pallet being immediately available for putaway may be compromised using this method, depending on how it is implemented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Putaway ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the system uses RDT Goods Receipt, the putaway messages are sent automatically to the WCS as each pallet is updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If RDT Goods Receipt is not in use (or the receipt has not been completed via the WCS at all), the system will send putaway messages to the WCS when CONF is entered in the Goods Receipt Confirmation screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT user scans the pallet to be put away. This can be via system pallet ID, customer pallet ID or stock code and quantity. The WCS checks that there is a putaway for this pallet. If there is, the user is prompted to take the pallet to the assigned destination location. When at the destination, the user is asked to confirm their location in the standard fashion. Once the location is confirmed, the pallet is confirmed put away by the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If user is unable to position the pallet in the suggested location, they can be optionally given the option to reposition the pallet to a new location. See section  for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can display further information about the pallet by pressing the additional information key. This will currently display the Owner and Stock codes on the pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pallet being put away has several stock codes on it, the RDT user will be prompted to confirm the stock and quantity for each item, as a check when the pallet is being positioned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the stock on the pallet is being positioned to several locations (i.e. multiple stock codes being put in their respective pick faces), the RDT will direct the users to each required location in order, confirming the stock and quantity when there for each item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required (and enabled) the RDT user can pick up several pallets on the truck at once and the user will be taken to each pallet’s destination in order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pallet Enquiry ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By entering this module and scanning the pallet ID, the user is provided information about the pallet, consisting of the main elements from the WMS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
* Rotation&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer’s Batch&lt;br /&gt;
* Owner code&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock code&lt;br /&gt;
* Description of the stock&lt;br /&gt;
* Pallet quantity in location&lt;br /&gt;
* Manufacture and sell-by dates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are multiple pallets in the warehouse with this identifier, or the pallet is of mixed stock, all the information is displayed, allowing the user to page through the available information in any order they choose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the event of a movement on the pallet, the records to be displayed are decided upon by the use of the following table:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Moving Out&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Moving In&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;On Hand&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! Reason&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Show?&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock move in and out&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| P&amp;amp;D pallet&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Pallet moving out&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| NOT POSSIBLE IN SYSTEM&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Replenishment&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Record to – shown above&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Normal Pallet&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;N&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Error situation which users may want to see&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Y&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
This enquiry is also available from the Enquiries sub-menu from any other task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pallet labels can be printed from this module. This is configurable and uses a label format defined on WCS. Standard formats are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location Enquiry ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By entering this module and scanning the location code, the user is provided information about the pallet, consisting of the main elements from the WMS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
* Owner code&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock code&lt;br /&gt;
* Description of the stock&lt;br /&gt;
* Location quantity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are multiple pallets in the location, or the pallets are of mixed stock, all the information for these pallets is displayed, allowing the user to page through the available information in any order they choose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the event of a movement on the pallet, the pallets will be displayed showing the on-hand quantity. This means that if a pallet is moving out of the location, it will be shown with the full quantity. If the pallet is moving into the location, it will be shown with zero quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This enquiry is also available from the Enquiries sub-menu from any other task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Movement Enquiry ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two previous sections contain references to pallets mid-movement. The enquiries show the data to the best of the WMS’s ability. This enquiry shows any outstanding tasks on the WCS’s database, showing the source and destination of the pallet. This allows users to decide what must be done when a rogue pallet is found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This enquiry is also available from the Enquiries sub-menu from any other task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Picking ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Full Pallet Picking ===&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On entry to the picking module, the WCS will provide the user with a pick request to fulfil. If this is a full pallet bulk pick, the user will be prompted to go to the location of the pallet, and pick it. If the location is unavailable, the user can change the pallet to be picked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user wishes to change the pallet to pick, they can press the error key and choose 'Pallet change'. If the pallet is changed in this way, the user will be forced to enter the quantity picked and the quantity remaining, in case the new pallet has a different quantity available on it than the first pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When taking the pallet to marshalling, the RDT displays either the order or the route/load of which the stock is part. If the order is on a load, the order reference can be found by using the Information function key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Part-pallet Picking ===&lt;br /&gt;
Part Picking covers both Case picking and Unit picking, if both the WCS and WMS are enabled for this. See section  for details of multiple UOM processing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On entry to the part-picking module, the WCS will provide the user with a pick request to fulfil. The user will first have a summary screen displayed, showing the order or route/load given to the user and the number of tasks for the user to complete. The customer name is also included, from the first pick task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will be prompted to go to the location of the pallet, and pick it. (The user has the option of choosing where to start picking, i.e. they can choose a start location at this point.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Checks can be made on the pick pallet to ensure that the required replenishment has been completed to the pick location before the pick is released to the pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the location is unavailable, the user can cancel the pick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will be prompted to confirm either the stock code or the pallet, depending on whether the stock is palletised. There is also the option to identify the pallet by the stock code only, by stock and batch or by pallet and stock, with a visual confirmation of batch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user also optionally has the ability to show the exact details of the pallet, to identify the pallet if the pallet label is missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then be prompted to enter the picked quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pick quantity can be entered as a quantity (or cases/units), or the RDT can prompt the user to scan the stock code of the case being picked once for each carton removed from the location. At this point, the RDT can print a carton label for each carton removed. If entered as a quantity, the RDT can optionally allow over-picking (for variable carton quantities).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS can also be set up to consolidate quantities on orders allocate to route/loads, so that only one pick per pallet in a location need be completed in order to fulfil all the stock required by all the orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After entering the picked quantity, the user can be optionally prompted to enter the remaining quantity. This is to ensure that the pick faces have an accurate amount on the pallet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS can also be set up so that the module will require the supervisor to enter a system password to allow the user to continue with their task, should they change any quantity. This validation is performed on-line, from the data held on the WMS at the point of picking. If the quantities are different to the values sent, the user will be prompted to enter a reason code, which will be passed on to the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process also includes Despatch Pallet building, when part picks are consolidated on to one pallet. This functionality is flagged in the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the RDT will, at the point of completing a single case pick, ask the user if they want to continue picking, or take the pallet to the marshalling location. If the user chooses to continue picking, the RDT will prompt the user for the next pick in the list. If the user chooses that they have finished picking on to their pallet, they will be told to take the pallet to the marshalling location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can, when building despatch pallets, give them a unique identifier called a picking container. This is prompted for when picking starts, and after each trip to marshalling. This identifier is held on the WMS and is used in the deconsolidation process (see )&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When taking the pallet to marshalling, the RDT displays either the order or the route/load of which the stock is part. If the order is on a load, the order reference can be found by using the Information function key. This pop-up will also display the customer name and address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the pallet has been confirmed picked, a message is sent to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the quantities involved are valid (i.e. they add up the quantity available on the pallet), the line will be confirmed. If not, the line will not be confirmed, and the WMS will request that a user confirm the line manually, and make any necessary changes to the data on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should all lines be automatically confirmed on an order or route/load, the WMS can automatically print a despatch note in the required format to a defined printer. This is configurable and, if printed, will print in the format defined for the owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During picking, it may be that a pallet to pick has problems, or may not yet be available for picking. In this instance, the client wishes to put this pick to the back of their “queue”, and process any other picks for the order. The module provides a function key press to accommodate this. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despatch or Pick label printing is supported in the WCS. The printing can take place either at the point of picking or taking to marshalling, to deal with several types of printer. Any wireless or networked printer may be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sky-picking and split-down picks are also accommodated in the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the quantities and the pallet have been confirmed, the user will be prompted to go to the destination location, which will be a marshalling location. When confirmed, the data is updated on the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick Locking ===&lt;br /&gt;
The normal processing of picks in the WCS includes the ability to lock several picks together, to ensure that the user completes all tasks together. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This functionality is standard, as the locking record is based around the ‘pages’ functionality in the WMS. This is where sort sequences, pick sequences and page totals define a Page Number for a number of picks records (WARE_DESPATCH_DETAILS). An order would most commonly be broken down into pages as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type (Pick, Bulk, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* Area&lt;br /&gt;
* Aisle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each time these items change, another page would be produced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In standard, when the WCS receives these picks from the WMS, it creates the pick details record (Picking) and the task to control the pick (the Truck Move and Pending Truck Moves records). It also creates locking record (Picking Header) for each Order Number/Page combination. If picks for that page already exist, it associates the picking record arriving with the already existing Picking Header record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user enters the Picking or Part Picking modules on the RDT, they are assigned the first pick that they are capable of doing (following the rules about location efficiency and priority). The WCS locks this picking task to the user, and also locks the appropriate header record as well, thereby preventing any other user accessing picks on that order/page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the user completes a pick, the task is deleted, and the picking record deleted if appropriate (there could be further stages to the move – from P&amp;amp;D to marshalling, for example)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the user completes all the picks for the page, the picking header is also deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user does not complete all picking tasks on the page, but backs out of the tasks, the current pick is released, and the Picking Header is also released, to allow someone else to continue with the picks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to create locking headers in different ways, depending on the set-up of the WCS and the data received from the WMS. In all cases, however, there must be a Picking Header record created, and the Picking and Part Picking options on the RDT will always lock this record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aisle locking can be enabled on the WCS, for Order or Route/Load combinations. The result is that, when the WCS receives the picks, it ignores the Page Number against the Order, and creates Picking Header records solely against the Order/aisle. If the Load Number is populated on the inbound pick, the Picking Header is created against the Route/Load/Aisle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS can also force an Order or Route/Load to be completely assigned to pickers before allowing any other pick to be completed. This forces all picks to be sent to the marshalling lane for one Order or Route/Load before any other is begun, and can aid in Marshalling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS can force the entire order or route/load to be assigned to one user, depending on type (e.g. full pallet picks will be given to one user, part-pallet picks will be given to another, different product types will be given to yet another, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be noted that this type of locking is ignored in certain modules on the WCS, resulting in the ability to complete picks without locking out any other users. Examples of such modules are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dual Cycling (NADC, WADC)&lt;br /&gt;
* Truck Moves&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Move&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Allocating Picking Tasks to Users ===&lt;br /&gt;
Pick moves on the WCS are created on receipt of messages sent from the WMS. The move details are set up in the light of the group/owner/warehouse/system flag settings current at that time. The picks are allocated to pick groups (Picking Headers) so that allocation of picks to RDTs can be controlled. Any combining of picks together, if not been done by WMS, (consolidated picks) is also done at this time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an RDT requests pick tasks, the request is actioned in two phases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# All suitable picks are selected from the available moves. The significant flags referred to are &amp;quot;Enable Pick Dependencies&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Concurrent Picking&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Pick Page Allocation&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Enable Hold Priority&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Pick In Sequence&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Pick Consolidate Group&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Pick By Carton&amp;quot;. The selection is made on the basis of:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
#* Move is associated with a Picking Header (i.e. is a pick),&lt;br /&gt;
#* Company of move matches Logon Company,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Warehouse of move matches Logon Warehouse,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Owner of move matches Logon Owner is this is restricted; otherwise Owner of move is a non-restricted Owner,&lt;br /&gt;
#* The From-Location-Type of move permits the Logon Truck Type,&lt;br /&gt;
#* The To-Location-Type of move permits the Logon Truck Type,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Move has not already reached Destination Location, i.e. is not returning the pallet to Source Location after picking from it,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Status Flag of move is PENDING,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Priority of move is not HELD,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Type of move is not a Stock Move,&lt;br /&gt;
#* When requesting Part Picks, Type of move is a PART PICK; When requesting Full Pallet Picks, Type of move is not a PART PICK,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Picking Header associated with the move is already assigned to the RDT or is not assigned to any RDT,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Picking Header associated with the move is already assigned to the Employee or is not assigned to any Employee,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Either- Stage of move is beyond first, i.e. moved out of Source Location, Or- No replenishment move on the same pallet is yet to deliver to the Source Location,&lt;br /&gt;
#* If next stage of move is to a PND, that there is room for another pallet (i.e. max number of pallets in the PND will not be exceeded),&lt;br /&gt;
#* If Full Pick and next stage of move is from a PND- if Type of PND is FIFO that there is not another pallet at the PND which had been moved there earlier; If LIFO that there is not another pallet at the PND which had been moved there later,&lt;br /&gt;
#* If move is for a Route/Load, that the move is on the order which has highest Drop No in that Route/Load (new development)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The list of suitable picks obtained in () is ordered on the criteria (highest priority first):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
#* Pick Header of move already has moves assigned to an RDT,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Pick Header already assigned to Employee,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Priority of move,&lt;br /&gt;
#* If Employee specified Start Location, sequence number of move (which designates sequence of locations from Start Location),&lt;br /&gt;
#* Order Number,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Page Number,&lt;br /&gt;
#* Sequence Number (on page).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' As described above, the allocation of picks is dependent on decisions made not only at picking time but also when the pick details first sent to WCS from WMS. If changes are made on the WMS to location definitions or on the WCS to certain flag settings, any pending picks which are dependent on these definitions/settings should be removed and re-sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Labelling ===&lt;br /&gt;
If labelling pallets through the WCS, the following items can currently be used on the produced pallet label:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Field&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RouteCode&lt;br /&gt;
| Route/Load to which the order is assigned&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| LoadNo&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| EXELOrdNo&lt;br /&gt;
| Order Reference (first 15 characters)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OrderRef1&lt;br /&gt;
| Alternative Order References&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OrderRef2&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OrderDescription&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| DateTime&lt;br /&gt;
| Dates and Times&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| SysDate&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| SysTime&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OwnerCode&lt;br /&gt;
| Owner of the stock picked&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picker/Picker ID&lt;br /&gt;
| The ID of the picker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| MarshLoc&lt;br /&gt;
| The Marshalling location of the order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PickText&lt;br /&gt;
| The instructions sent out on the last pick task completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| StockCode&lt;br /&gt;
| Received stock on pallet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PalletID&lt;br /&gt;
| System Pallet ID of the stock last picked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| TotalQtyPicked&lt;br /&gt;
| Qty Picked of the last stock Picked&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| TotalQtyAlloc&lt;br /&gt;
| Qty originally allocated of the last stock picked&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Prio&lt;br /&gt;
| Priority of the last task completed in WCS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Name&lt;br /&gt;
| Customer’s name and address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AddrLine1&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| AddrLine2&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Town&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| County&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Country&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PostCode&lt;br /&gt;
| “&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
== Pallet Moves/Replenishment ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is prompted to go to a location. Once they have confirmed their position, they are told to scan the correct pallet. Once this is confirmed, they are required to move the pallet to the correct destination location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This process is the basis for any RDT system. As such, it requires the ability to correct any inconsistencies between the main database and the physical stock. The user is given several processes to accomplish this, most of which can be enabled or disabled: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Reposition pallet at destination&lt;br /&gt;
* Cancel movement at source&lt;br /&gt;
* Change pallet (in block stack or multi-deep warehouses)&lt;br /&gt;
* Display further information about the pallet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See section  for details of Movement Exceptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mixed Stock moves ===&lt;br /&gt;
The system allows for pallets of several stock codes to be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Replenishments ===&lt;br /&gt;
Replenishments are dealt with in the same way as pallet moves, but obviously have a greater effect if exceptional events occur. Therefore, a replenishment move may not be repositioned, although it may be cancelled. See section  for details. Replenishments can be those generated from the WMS from Allocation (Dynamic replenishments) or requested Bulk-to-Pick replenishments. The system also supports the user of Replenishment locations above the pick face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS can reduce the number of replenishments available to a pick face to one, by the use of a flag, to avoid overloading a pick face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Replenishment Strategy ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS contains several mechanisms of controlling replenishment moves to a pick face:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Picker Replens, which allow the picker the ability to reprioritise the required replenishment to the pick face, or even do it themselves;&lt;br /&gt;
# Pick Dependencies, which stop the user being sent for a specific pick if the replenishment associated to that pick has not been completed;&lt;br /&gt;
# Replenishment Dependencies, which prevent the moving of more than one replenishment move to a pick face at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another area that can be seen as ‘replenishment’ is the split-down functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Split-down Functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
When picking from high-bay, defined as racking (non-pick) areas with P&amp;amp;D locations defined against the aisles, the WCS will plan those moves out to a defined Split-down area. They become 3-stage moves:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Move from bulk location to P&amp;amp;D location&lt;br /&gt;
# Move from P&amp;amp;D location to defined split-down area&lt;br /&gt;
# Pick from pallet in split-down area to defined marshalling location for the order or route/load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS will not allow the user to be sent for the pick before the split-down move has been completed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pallet will stay in the defined split-down area until all picks designed to take stock from the pallet have been completed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all have been completed, the pallet will then be planned back into the racking, back to its original bulk location, through a 2-stage move:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Move from defined split-down location to P&amp;amp;D location&lt;br /&gt;
# Move from P&amp;amp;D location back to racking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cherry Picking ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cherry Picking module allows a user to pick the first available pick task for an entered order. The users do not lock tasks – other users are allowed to pick on the same order. Users are allowed to complete as many tasks as are available and valid for them on the order, if continuous part picking is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are no more picks available on the selected order, the user is returned to the prompt for Order number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all other ways, the pick acts exactly as the part picking module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deconsolidation ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order for this module to be used, the system must have enabled Picking Containers for the picking function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flowchart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When orders are pick confirmed, either automatically through the RDT confirmation of picks, or manually, if required, a message will be sent to the WCS to allow the orders to be deconsolidated. Note: Route/loads can’t be deconsolidated until all orders on the route/load have been confirmed as picked by the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT user will enter the new deconsolidation module and will be prompted to scan a container number in any marshalling location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS will first confirm that this route/load is available for deconsolidation and packing (i.e. the route/load has been pick confirmed in the WMS). If this is not the case, an error will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If available, the WCS will then check that the picks require deconsolidation. The rules for this are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order must have been allocated to a route/load within the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If on a route/load, there must be multiple customers for the orders on the route/load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the picking container scanned does not conform to these rules, the user will simply be prompted to confirm that the stock is ready to be despatch confirmed. If the user responds that this is the case, a message will be sent to the WMS to confirm the order(s) as despatch confirmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the stock is available for deconsolidation, the RDT will prompt the user to collect all the other containers for the route/load, displaying them as a list, with the user scanning each container number required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should a container not be found, the user will have an error function at this point, which should be supervisor controlled. If they press the error key, the unit will prompt them to get authorisation from a supervisor. Once authorised, the packing tasks will be set to an error status, awaiting manual confirmation within the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all picking containers have been confirmed as found, the RDT will display a summary screen, showing the first order to be packed, displaying the customer on the order, the order number and the total number of cases to be packed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can optionally enter a final media container number at this point. This will not be validated in the WCS as the maintenance of these final media container numbers is expected to be controlled by external systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This final media number will be sent back and stored on the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There will be an option on the RDT screen (via a function key press) to change the final media being packed into. This is so that orders which spread over multiple packs can be accommodated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT will then prompt for the first stock code to be packed on the order and the picking container in which this stock can be found and require the user to confirm the stock by scanning the barcode on the stock code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the barcode is scanned, the RDT checks that the EAN barcode scanned is not duplicated on another stock code. If it is, the RDT displays a warning for the user that this is the case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT will then display the first batch for that stock code on that order and the total quantity to be found in the picking container for that stock, batch and order. The user will be asked to confirm the amount found in the container for that stock, batch and order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the amount entered by the user does not match the amount expected in the container, the user will be asked to confirm the amount found again. The RDT will continue to prompt for the quantity found until the user enters the same quantity twice in a row. Once the quantities entered match, the RDT will request a supervisor’s username and password to unlock the terminal. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The supervisor should confirm the problem that the user is having and, should a shortage still be found, they will be asked to confirm the actual quantity found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should remove the stock from the picking container and pack the stock in the final media at this point. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the quantity is confirmed, either by correctly entering it on the first attempt or by supervisor override, and the final picking container is identified, the figure will be reflected back on to the WMS immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then be asked to confirm the quantity of all other batches for that stock and all other stock items for that order, until all lines are packed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will be prompted to pack all items for all orders on the route/load, until all orders are confirmed packed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all orders have been deconsolidated, the RDT will display that all tasks are deconsolidated, and the orders will be made ready to despatch on the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a rule-controlled variant of Deconsolidation called Ad Hoc Deconsolidation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this rule is set, the user has the ability to choose the sequence of the orders deconsolidated, rather than being told which orders to deconsolidate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, if this rule is set, the user has the ability to choose which stock on the order is to be deconsolidated first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Despatch by Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use this module, the system must have Picking Containers and Deconsolidation enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flowchart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entered, the RDT module will prompt for an order to be despatched. The user will scan the order number from the despatch note, or will key in the order number. The order number scanned will be displayed on the screen. Any number of orders can be scanned at this point, the list below the scanned item showing all orders scanned, latest at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user has scanned all the orders required, they can confirm that the orders are to be despatched by pressing F1. The RDT will display a confirmation box. Should the user cancel, they will be returned to the order prompt. Should they confirm that the orders are to be despatched, the WCS will send a message to the WMS for each order entered, confirming that the orders are to be despatch confirmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Loading (by Picking Container) ==&lt;br /&gt;
This process can be used in place of the Despatch process above. It can be used either directly from Pick Confirmation, or from Deconsolidation and Pack (using the final media number).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flowchart &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use this module, the system must have Picking Containers enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is prompted to enter a route/load or order to be loaded. Once confirmed, the RDT displays a list of all the containers that must be found for the stock to be considered loaded. The user must scan the picking container of the pallets loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If containers are lost, the user is given the ability to reflect this through an error function key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As each container is entered, they are removed from the RDT screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all containers are loaded, the WMS is updated showing that the order or load is despatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stock Check ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of stock taking procedure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Full Stock Check - This is where the user enters what is counted without recourse to the current stock levels (blind stock check).&lt;br /&gt;
* Partial Stock Check - This is where the user checks stock against the current stock levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the WMS, a range of locations, stock codes etc. to stock check should be chosen, described more fully in the client-generated operations document. The user will be prompted to confirm his selections, and this will submit the stock take cycle to be processed. It is at this point that the messages will be sent to the WCS, if the interface is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the Stock take module, and the RDT will display a cycle to be processed. The cycle is chosen based on its priority and age. If the user does not wish to process this cycle, he can enter another, valid cycle here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required cycle is chosen, the user confirms their selection. The user will now be taken into the stock take module proper.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user has selected a “partial” stock take, they will be taken into the partial-processing module. If they have chosen a “full” (blind) stock take, they will be taken into the full processing module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== “Full” Stock Check ===&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT will prompt the user to go to a location and confirm that they are there. The user should then enter the pallet ID. If there are no pallets in the location, the user should press confirm and move on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pallet ID is entered, the user should then enter the stock code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should then enter the quantity. Once this has been entered, the user will be prompted to confirm the quantity entered. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the data is entered and confirmed, the WCS compare the data against the pre-advised levels. If the pallet ID and stock code entered were part of the cycle, the quantities are checked. If the quantities are the same, a message is sent that the pallet was found successfully. If the quantities are different, the WMS will be informed that the pallet was there, but modified. If the pallet was not advised, the user will be taken into the add sub-process, to enter the rest of the pallet details (such as the manufactured date etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, the WCS will decide if this was a mixed pallet, by trying to find any other advised pallets in that location of the same pallet ID. If any are found, the user will be taken to the product prompt again. The user should confirm whether the remaining stock on the pallet is present in the same way as above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all pallets in the location have been counted, the user confirms this and they will be taken to a new location to count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== “Partial” Stock Take ===&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT will process the first record in the stock check. This will be ordered by the method chosen in the cycle generation screen, either location within product, or product within location, the latter being the more common choice for RDTs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will be prompted to go to a location and confirm that they are there. If these are valid, then the user will be shown the first pallet for this location, and the quantity details for this pallet. At this point, there are several actions available to the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the quantities are correct, the user can confirm. &lt;br /&gt;
* If the quantities are incorrect, the user can amend the quantities. The RDT will then display the correct quantities, and the user will then confirm this amendment. &lt;br /&gt;
* If the Pallet does not exist on the location, the user should zero the quantities. The RDT will then display the pallet, with zero quantities, and the user will confirm this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are no more pallets to display in this location, the RDT will display a message as such, and allow the user to confirm this. If there is another pallet in this location, the user can add one by pressing the add key. The user will be taken into the add sub-process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sub-process ===&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘add’ sub-process will prompt the user for all essential information about the pallet, such as the location, pallet ID, stock code, manufactured date etc. When the user has finished input of the pallet’s details, they will be taken through the cycle again to check the details entered. When the user is happy with the entered details, they will confirm it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bulk PI ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flowchart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows the user to check the contents of any location in the warehouse at any time. The function is only available when an on-line link to the WMS is available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is prompted to go to a location. The user will scan the location to be checked. The WCS will then check what is in that location with the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then be prompted to enter the pallet(s) found in the location. Once the pallet has been identified, the user will be prompted to blind enter the quantity on the pallet. Should the user enter the quantity as expected, the check will be confirmed and the RDT will request if there are any more pallets in the location. The checks continue in similar fashion until all pallets are checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should the quantity entered not be the same as on the WMS, the user will be required to re-confirm the amount counted. Only when the user has confirmed two identical counts in a row will the value be accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On confirming a pallet, a message will be sent to the WMS with the count details. The WMS will not perform any required adjustments, although this is configurable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any discrepancies discovered by the process are fully documented on the WMS, accessible through an Ad Hoc Stock Take report. This report can show, by date, owner and /or stock, the pallets checked and discrepancies discovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select Replenishment ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows an RDT user to scan a pick face, check whether there are any outstanding replenishment moves for the pick face, and complete the moves if required. The process will also generate replenishments if none are available on the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process prompts the user to enter and confirm a location. The location is validated for several criteria:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pick Face&lt;br /&gt;
* Unknown location&lt;br /&gt;
* Multiple Stock codes assigned to pick face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If multiple stock codes are assigned to the pick face, the RDT prompts the user to enter/select their owner and stock code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the stock and location are confirmed, the WCS searches for any move available to replenish the pick face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a move is found, the user is offered the choice of completing the move as per normal pallet moves (if they are able to complete the move), or to reprioritise the move to the highest priority, ensuring it is delivered to the pick face as quickly as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no moves are available on the WCS, it checks with the WMS to see if any are available. At this point, further checks are made:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Move exists on WMS not WCS&lt;br /&gt;
* Problem generating move&lt;br /&gt;
* No pallet of required type available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should a pallet be found, the user is asked to complete the move in the same way as before&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select Moves ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A function exists to select an individual movement task by a range of criteria. The criteria are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* By location (Current location, source location, destination location)&lt;br /&gt;
* By Pallet ID (System or Customer)&lt;br /&gt;
* By WMS Movement reference (Movement Audit number and Line number)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the task is identified, the user is allowed to complete the movement task in the same way as in the normal modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ad Hoc Pallet Moves ==&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ad Hoc Pallet Moves in WCS are used to process movements that originate with the RDT users, rather than originating with WMS. This is to allow users to resolve problems quickly, without having to key tasks into WMS first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like all WCS modules, this can be disabled or password protected on users’ menus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These moves will be validated by the WCS and the WMS in combination. The user will be prompted to enter a reason code, which must be valid. They will then be prompted to enter the location from which to move a pallet. This will be validated on the WMS and the user will be required to confirm the location in the standard fashion. The user will then be prompted to enter the pallet to move, which must be present in the WMS. If this is valid, the user will be prompted for the destination location and confirmation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all these steps are complete, the user will be returned to the main menu, the pallet will have been moved and an audit trail maintained in WMS and WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dual Cycling ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS also allows dual cycling in several forms: Narrow Aisle dual cycling (and the subsets allowing only moves in or out), and Wide Area dual cycling. The menu options are controlled by the log-on process, as described earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each dual cycling process supports the same functionality as any of the tasks it is performing, obeying all the same rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All full-pallet tasks in the WCS are available for RDT users utilising Dual Cycling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several parameters in the WCS control the exact performance of the Dual Cycling algorithm, including:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Nearest Location &lt;br /&gt;
* Aisle Locking&lt;br /&gt;
* Priority thresholds&lt;br /&gt;
* User Aisle access, limiting individual users to certain aisles&lt;br /&gt;
* User’s Truck Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Narrow Aisle Dual Cycling ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS allows the user to select an aisle range in which they work. This range of aisles can be preset against the use using the WCS Maintenance utility. The range controls the aisles the user can work in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several types of dual cycling options. All of these options can be used in conjunction with each other. So, if there is a requirement to have one truck in bulk doing all putaways and one truck in bulk doing all outbound moves, this is allowed by the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NADC IN ====&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows the users to perform the tasks which are going into the aisles. For this operation, that will be putaways. There is a possibility that this will also be housekeeping moves into the narrow aisle locations, but these are minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NADC OUT ====&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows the users to perform the tasks which are going out of the aisles. For this operation, that will be full-pallet picks and replenishment moves. There is a possibility that this will also be housekeeping moves out the narrow aisle locations, but these are minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NADC ====&lt;br /&gt;
Full dual cycling, mixing full pallet tasks both in and out of the warehouse. This does all of the tasks specified in the above two configurations. The tasks and the order in which they are completed depend on the configuration below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NADC Configuration ====&lt;br /&gt;
The NADC options can be configured in several ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Manual:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS shows a list of aisles that the user is working in (chosen at log on). This also shows the number of pallets planned to come out of the aisles, the number planned in, and whether the P&amp;amp;D locations are full. For this configuration, this will not cause an issue, as the P&amp;amp;D locations are effectively unlimited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user chooses an aisle from the list. They are then assigned a task from that aisle. The aisle is locked to that user and no other NADC user can access (or indeed) that aisle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user completed tasks in that aisle until there are no more tasks in the aisle, or they choose to move to a different aisle. When this happens, the aisle list is shown again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tasks completed depend on the type chosen (NADC IN, NADC OUT or NADC). The user completed as many of the tasks in the aisle as they can until there are no more tasks or they leave the aisle to go to another. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Threshold''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A parameter is set in WCS, showing a threshold priority. This priority controls what the NADC process sees as high priority tasks, or just tasks that can be mixed together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any tasks which are below the threshold priority are grouped together and dealt with in strict location efficient order. The user will work in the aisle they are in, until no more tasks are available. The user will then be prompted to move to a nearby aisle with tasks in to complete until all outstanding tasks are completed in that aisle. The truck will move between aisles until all tasks are completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When tasks are received which are above the threshold priority, the tasks are allocated immediately to the next available truck that has access to those aisles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the high priority tasks must be completed first before any of the tasks below the threshold are completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the high priority tasks are completed, the user carries on completing the lower priority tasks until all are completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Threshold setup, the priorities of the outbound tasks are the driving force, not the inbound tasks. In NADC IN, all the inbound tasks are completed in location efficient manner. In NADC OUT the high priority outbound tasks are completed first in a location efficient manner, and then the low priority tasks are completed, also in a location efficient manner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In NADC, the high priority outbound tasks are completed first in a location efficient manner. After each outbound task is completed, the WCS will ask the user to complete a putaway in that aisle, if one is available. When all outbound tasks are completed within an aisle, the user will move to another aisle with outbound tasks, regardless of the number of inbound tasks remaining in the aisle. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are no more high priority picking tasks available, the low priority tasks are completed, also in a location efficient manner. As above, after each outbound task is completed, the WCS will ask the user to complete a putaway in that aisle, if one is available. When all outbound tasks are completed within an aisle, the user will move to another aisle with outbound tasks, regardless of the number of inbound tasks remaining in the aisle. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When there are no more outbound tasks available to be completed within the aisles, the user will be prompted to complete the putaways in the aisles, in a location efficient manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wide Area Dual Cycling (WADC) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Wide Area dual cycling will interleave any tasks in the wide area in the most efficient manner, attempting to ensure that the trucks operating in this area have pallets on the tines for as long as possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WA dual cycling needs to account for movements of the following types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FPP- P&amp;amp;D to MARSH&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Replen- P&amp;amp;D to PICK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sky Pick- P&amp;amp;D to SPLIT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- SPLIT to P&amp;amp;D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move - P&amp;amp;D to P&amp;amp;D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putaway- REC to P&amp;amp;D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WA racking areas would be controlled via a different truck type. (Truck types limit the moves a user is able to do by the standard location type functionality in WMS). In WA racking, the tasks would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FPP- BULK to MARSH&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Replen- BULK to PICK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sky Pick- none required – only in NA&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move - BULK to BULK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putaway- REC to BULK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putaways should not be allowed to be picked up from receiving location if the P&amp;amp;D it is to be placed to is currently full (in a limited P&amp;amp;D environment). This should only occur if the number of pallets allowed at the P&amp;amp;D is set higher in WMS than WCS. This is a reasonably valid set-up, to allow for the time taken to take a pallet from receiving to P&amp;amp;D, and then to be put away by a NA truck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sequence of actions would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Start WA DC&lt;br /&gt;
# Check for putaways or cross-docks available. &lt;br /&gt;
# If none, display message, go to below.&lt;br /&gt;
# If some, get task (user scans PID)&lt;br /&gt;
# If cross-dock, take to marshalling, go to below&lt;br /&gt;
# If putaway, take to P&amp;amp;D or BULK&lt;br /&gt;
# Get next task (if location efficient, nearest; if priority efficient, next in sequence)&lt;br /&gt;
# If none, display message, go to below.&lt;br /&gt;
# If task is move (P&amp;amp;D to P&amp;amp;D, P&amp;amp;D to BULK, BULK to P&amp;amp;D or BULK to BULK), complete task, go to above.&lt;br /&gt;
# If task is sky pick (P&amp;amp;D to SPLIT)&lt;br /&gt;
## Complete task&lt;br /&gt;
## Look for sky pick (SPLIT to P&amp;amp;D). If found, complete task, go to above.&lt;br /&gt;
# If task is FPP (P&amp;amp;D to MARSH or BULK to MARSH) or Replen (P&amp;amp;D to PICK or BULK to PICK), &lt;br /&gt;
## Complete task&lt;br /&gt;
## Look for sky pick (SPLIT to P&amp;amp;D). If found, complete task, go to above.&lt;br /&gt;
# If no tasks found at all in loop, display message and exit else go to above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Bespoke RDT Modules =&lt;br /&gt;
Other modules developed in the past, but not part of the standard product, are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Serial number Capture at Receipt and Despatch&lt;br /&gt;
* Loading and despatch confirmation by carton&lt;br /&gt;
* Shipment Pallet building (from Packing)&lt;br /&gt;
* Housekeeping moves of Shipment Pallets&lt;br /&gt;
* Despatch by Shipment Pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
* Links to automated systems (MHE, camera scanners, conveyors, P&amp;amp;D systems, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* Uploading of batch files to WMS&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Moves (Combined Split)&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
* Ad Hoc Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some these modules are covered in more detail in the following sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Serial Number Capture at Receipt and Despatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
This functionality does not link into the generic receipt module, or into any despatch modules. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The nature of serial number scanning is such that the Serial Number processing and validation is dependent entirely upon the barcodes received and the format of the information contained therein. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flowcharts for these processes can be found in appendices  and .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Serial Number Capture at Receipt ===&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT will prompt the user for the GRN being received against, which is validated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user then enters the pallet the serial numbers are being received against, which is also validated against the preadvice sent from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The preadvice contains details of how serial numbers are to be entered for each stock code. These types are Range or Random.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the type is Range, the user is prompted to enter a first and last serial number for the range. The RDT examines this to ensure it fulfils the quantity required for the receipt line, by extracting the data from the serial numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the type is Random, the user is prompted to enter a Lot number for the subsequent serial numbers. The RDT will then prompt for a batch of serial numbers, up to the amount required in one lot. The RDT will then continue to prompt for the required number of Lots until the pallet is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can then continue entering serial numbers for all other pallets on the receipt, until all are completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Serial Number Capture at Despatch ===&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT prompts the user for the Order Number being despatched, which is validated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT then retrieves the details of the first stock to be despatched, and displays the details of the line, plus the details of the pallet to be found in the despatch bay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can then choose a scanning method:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By Batch – The user confirms that all serial numbers for a specific customer’s batch have been despatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By Lot – The user confirms that entire Lots of serial numbers have been despatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By Serial – The user confirms each serial number despatched individually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the order line has been completely fulfilled, the user is prompted to move on to the next order line, until all required serials for all lines have been scanned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Loading by Carton ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use this process, carton picking must be used (a variant of Part Picking, where all cartons are labelled with unique carton references as they are picked).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When WCS sends message to WMS regarding completion of the picking task, the system should create carton records for each carton picked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flow chart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDT logs in to Loading process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scan / Enter Store number(s) or Route/Load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scan / Enter Vehicle number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then scan Carton barcode for the items to put them on the truck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an item is found where the barcode is unreadable or the barcode is missing, there is a function key – No ID. When pressed, the user should be prompted to enter the order number and the item number. This should be enough to identify the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Function keys available:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
F1 – Truck Full – Show user summary screen of what is on that truck. User confirms. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
F4 – Finished (no more stock for order/route/load) – Show user screen of what is missing for the route/load. User told to find shortages. If the user confirms that they are finished again (by pressing the same function key), the unit should prompt for a supervisor username and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When completed, the WCS marks all cartons scanned as loaded and then creates a flat-file EDI message for sending back to the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the EDI message is received, the WMS updates its carton records with the cartons loaded, the prints a despatch note for the stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shipment Pallet Processes ==&lt;br /&gt;
These functions should only be used if Packaging functions are in use and are RF enabled (currently only in Oracle FSCE).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All shipment pallet and location information is held against the order and pack list, and is not replicated in the normal WMS pallet tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flowcharts for these processes can be found in appendix .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shipment Pallet Building ===&lt;br /&gt;
This module is used to take completed packages and place them on a shipment pallet, ready for loading and despatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is prompted to enter a valid package, which is then validated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user then scans a shipment pallet ID, usually from a list of pre-printed unique barcode labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pallet already exists, the RDT checks the validity of placing the package on the shipment pallet. The criteria used to check this varies based on the data that is sent through to the WCS for this purpose, but commonly consists of carrier, priority and a ‘Share Pallet’ flag, which controls whether packages of different priorities can be shipped together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pallet does not exist, one is created, with the criteria of the package being placed on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When placed on a pallet, the package is updated on WMS to show the pallet on which it is to be despatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shipment Pallet Move ===&lt;br /&gt;
This module is used to move completed shipment pallets to storage locations, prior to them being loaded and despatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is prompted to enter a valid shipment pallet. This pallet must be fully built and closed. Closing of shipment pallets is achieved on the WMS, which then updates the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT then prompts for the storage location of the shipment pallet, which is validated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WMS is updated with the new storage location of the pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A pallet may be moved several times before it is loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shipment Pallet Despatch ===&lt;br /&gt;
This module is used to confirm that a shipment pallet has been loaded and despatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is prompted to enter a shipment pallet, which is validated as ready for despatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is then asked to confirm that this pallet is loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When confirmed, the WMS is informed that the pallet is despatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stock Enquiry ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is a module written for another WMS and is currently unavailable in the normal WCS/WMS combination, either Oracle or C-ISAM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT prompts the user for a stock code then passes the request on to the WMS. The WMS responds with a number of pallet records for the specified stock code. The details returned and displayed are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The stock code entered&lt;br /&gt;
* The pallet number on which the stock can be found.&lt;br /&gt;
* The amount of the specified stock on the pallet&lt;br /&gt;
* The description of the stock&lt;br /&gt;
* The location code the pallet is in&lt;br /&gt;
* A description of the location type the pallet is in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can step through the returned records and request the next batch of records after viewing the previous batch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Combined Split ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is a module written for another WMS and is currently unavailable in the normal WCS/WMS combination, either Oracle or C-ISAM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The combined split module allows stock to be moved from one pallet to another on an ad-hoc basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flowchart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user scans or enters the pallet of the stock to be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Owner of the stock is prompted for. A default value will be displayed if one was entered when the user logged on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stock to be moved is then prompted for. Once the code has been scanned or entered, it is checked against the WMS to validate it. If details of the stock for the source pallet cannot be found, an error is displayed – “Stock xxx not found on Pallet yyy”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quantity to be moved is prompted for. If the user has entered more than there is expected to be on the pallet, an error is displayed showing the amount entered and the amount the system expects to be present on the pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the next prompt, the ID of the destination pallet is scanned or entered. If the user enters “0”, they are given the opportunity to enter a destination location instead. This location is validated as normal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all details have been entered, stock update messages are sent to WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ad Hoc Putaway ==&lt;br /&gt;
This module is for use in a shelving environment, where stock on a pallet is taken to individual shelves, and as much of it is located in that location as possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See flowchart .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user is prompted to fetch a pallet and find a location in which some of the stock can be located. Once confirmed at this location, the user is prompted to enter the amount of the stock they intend to put away in that location, and then scan the stock code on each carton once for each carton put away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the stock has been put away, the user can then move onto other locations, until the pallet is empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they reach the end of the aisle with stock left on the pallet, the user can press F1 to indicate that the pallet still has stock on it. They are then prompted to return the half-full pallet to the receiving location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If all the stock on the pallet can fit in one location, the user can press the F5 key when prompted for the putaway quantity, to indicate that all remaining stock is to be placed in the location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pallet has less stock on it than the user was informed of, the user can indicate that the pallet is empty by pressing the F4 key. They must obtain authorisation from a supervisor to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WCS Functionality =&lt;br /&gt;
A priority of the development team has been to make the WCS system front-end as user-definable and friendly as possible. This means that most of the screens described below have customisable toolbars, customisable table structures, and hot-menus. Help is also provided. The menu system has been tailored to place most frequently used functions in reasonable order for speed. Hot key combinations have also been used, staying as close to Microsoft ™ standards as possible for familiarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A full description of how to use the maintenance utility is available in another document, reference Error: Reference source not found in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
Employee codes are used to log on to the WCS Maintenance system, in the same way that the RDT users are required to log in. This allows for the logging of actions taken by administrative users. The system will not allow the user to log on to the system if they are logged on somewhere else, depending on the way the user has been set up in the WCS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reprioritisation of Pallet Moves and Picks ==&lt;br /&gt;
These screens allow the users to manually modify the priority of existing movements and picks (full pallet and case picks) within the system. Standard and advanced selection criteria are provided and these selection values can be saved as templates for quick recall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks can be set to error status, held, recalled to available tasks and even deleted from the WCS (with logging), if the user has sufficient privilege.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pick Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
To aid in identifying the current picking work-load, this screen displays the tasks grouped by route and load, showing the total number of tasks per load and a general status of the load (error, in progress, pending, held). Double-clicking on a line displays all the picking tasks in the screen shown above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Logging ==&lt;br /&gt;
All incoming messages, outgoing messages, completed tasks and exceptions are logged to the database, so that they can be reported on. It is also possible to have all of these logging messages sent to a separate database, for easier archiving later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Employee Activity ==&lt;br /&gt;
This screen displays all employees logged on to RDTs in the specified company and warehouse. The screen is automatically refreshed every few seconds to keep the screen as current as possible. When an employee is engaged in RDT activity, details of this activity can be seen by double clicking on the relevant employee – a pop-up screen will display the details of the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any user that has had communication problems with the WCS (an unlikely occurrence, normally due to RDT hardware damage) can be freed from the WCS, allowing any tasks they were involved in to be completed by other available RDT users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any activity by a WCS user is logged (see section above) and can be recalled on a fully configurable enquiry screen, with complete selection criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exceptions ==&lt;br /&gt;
Exceptions are pre-defined events that occur in RDT processing of tasks. Examples of exceptions are: changing the quantity of a pick; cancelling a pick; cancelling a move; repositioning a move; changing a pallet on a move; changing a pallet on a pick or; adding a pallet at stock take. These may need to be observed and acted on by administrative staff and need to be viewable. This screen displays all exceptions that occur in the specified company and warehouse. The screen is automatically refreshed every few seconds to keep the screen as current as possible. When an exception has been logged, details of this activity can be seen by double clicking on the relevant line – a screen will display the details of the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Exception activity (e.g. modifying pick quantities, supervisor overrides, administration functions, repositioning and cancellation of movements, etc) by a WCS user is logged (see section above) and can be recalled on a fully configurable enquiry screen, with complete selection criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enquiries ==&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiries are provided for:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Goods Receipts&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Takes&lt;br /&gt;
* Shipment Pallets and Packages&lt;br /&gt;
* Pick Containers&lt;br /&gt;
* Deconsolidation and Despatches&lt;br /&gt;
* Movements&lt;br /&gt;
* Picks&lt;br /&gt;
* Historical Activities&lt;br /&gt;
* Historical Exceptions&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Types&lt;br /&gt;
* Trucks&lt;br /&gt;
* Pallet Types&lt;br /&gt;
* Reason Codes&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt Types&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Standing Data Maintenance ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS provides the ability to maintain the standing data required by the system, including:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* System Parameters&lt;br /&gt;
* Warehouses&lt;br /&gt;
* Users (employees)&lt;br /&gt;
* Owners&lt;br /&gt;
* Groups&lt;br /&gt;
* Aisles&lt;br /&gt;
* RDTs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Held Priority ==&lt;br /&gt;
This allows the lowest level of priority (9) to be processed as a held task. The task will then not be actionable by RDT users until the task is released. This feature can be turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Deleted records ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to change the WCS system to not delete completed tasks from the database when they have been completed. They are instead marked for deletion. These are then cleared out by a scheduled event (see later). This method has the advantage that logging of events has greater detail, but has the disadvantage of taking more space in the database. This system of not deleting records also allows re-submissions and reprocessing of tasks on the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parameter-controlled communication ==&lt;br /&gt;
System administrators have the ability to access additional set-up screens. These screens allow the WCS to be customised to communicate with any networked machine, via TCP/IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parameter-controlled Functions ==&lt;br /&gt;
Each RDT module can be enabled, disabled or password protected by system administrators. This can be done for an individual user, or for a warehouse as a default. This means that the system can be tailored for specific use for a warehouse, or even a specific user in a warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCS Administration functions can also be tailored for each user in the WCS, so that certain functions can be limited to certain users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Total database control ==&lt;br /&gt;
System administrators have access to generic database maintenance functions. These include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Repairing and compacting the RDB&lt;br /&gt;
* Clearing log files&lt;br /&gt;
* Complete file maintenance, via a separate utility&lt;br /&gt;
* Clear-down parameters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reports (user-definable) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Generic reports are available to the user, showing statistical analysis of employee activity, problems encountered, etc. Some data list reports are included for auditing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reports are viewed through the standard Windows functions i.e. notepad or Word, and can be exported for external printing or directly for emailing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reports are available as standard using the MS report designer component. Users can write their own reports utilising any ODBC-compliant report-writing tool at their disposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduler ==&lt;br /&gt;
A scheduler is included as part of the package to allow the user to place some small system maintenance programs onto the PC to run at regular intervals. These automatic maintenance programs are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clear-down ===&lt;br /&gt;
This program clears out old data and log files and tidies them up in a folder, specified by a system administrator. The number of days that the data stays on the system is user-definable, as is which data is cleared out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Compactor ===&lt;br /&gt;
The compactor repairs and compacts the RDB on a regular basis. This is not strictly necessary on well-managed systems, but will aid those users who wish the run the WCS in a very automated way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== RDT Messages ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS has a facility to send messages to RDT users who are on the Wireless LAN. These messages can be controlled in this way by logging the administrative user on to the Wireless LAN through the WCS Server. Messages are typed in, a user or user is chosen and the message is delivered to the RDT user the next time they request work. Warehouses that require communications to remote RDT users can now do so without further expense. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''WCS-WMS Communication'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Flowcharts'''&lt;br /&gt;
## '''RDT Log-on Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Receipts '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Putaways'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Full Pallet Picking'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Part-pallet Picking'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Pallet Moves'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Stock Take'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Pallet Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Location Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Movement Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Ad Hoc Movements'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Bulk PI'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Select Moves'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Loading by Carton'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Shipment Pallet processes'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Select Replenishment'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Serial Number Capture at Goods Receipt'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Serial Number Capture at Despatch'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Combined Split'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Ad Hoc Putaway'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Cherry Picking'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Deconsolidation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Despatch by Order'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Loading (by Picking Container)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=WCS_Maintenance&amp;diff=5</id>
		<title>WCS Maintenance</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=WCS_Maintenance&amp;diff=5"/>
		<updated>2009-05-13T11:56:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New page: = WCS Maintenance = This suite allows administrators to configure the WCS system, and modify the running of tasks within that system for the RDTs. When you log on, you need to open the...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= WCS Maintenance =&lt;br /&gt;
This suite allows administrators to configure the [[WCS]] system, and modify the running of tasks within that system for the RDTs. When you log on, you need to open the WCS database being used by the central WCS. There should only be one. You will not need to open the database if you start the WCS Maintenance program from the WCS Server program. This option is only available if the maintenance program is being run on the WCS Server PC. The Open Database command is on the File Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you open a database, you will by default be shown a list of recently opened database files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows for multiple WCS systems to be in operation for you. If you do not want to use this list, you can disable it by the check box provided. If the database you require is not listed, then you can choose to see more files. This will open a standard windows explorer dialogue. Once you have identified the database, this will be added to the top of your list of recent files. The settings panels allow you to modify the options for this list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be asked to enter your company and warehouse codes. This is to identify the data that you will be enquiring on in the RDT database. This can be changed later if required. The codes are the same as in your main warehouse management system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are also prompted to enter your username code and password, if required. These are the same as the employee codes in your main warehouse management system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The options you have available to you within the program depend upon the group your username has been given. The passwords (and other options) for your user, directly relating to this program can be maintained from the main menu from Standing Data Maintenance. If you have unavailable options, these items will be greyed out on the menus, and will not be available from the toolbar. Contact your administrative manager to obtain more options to the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several menus, which control all the features of the WCS Maintenance suite of windows. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDT Comms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
System Tools Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reports Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SD Maintenance Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on one of the items listed above to find help about the options available on that menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the useful items on the menus can be accessed via the toolbar. The toolbar can be maintained to suite your preference. See ToolBars for more information on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This help can also be accessed by use of the F1 key, within the windows themselves. This, along with the icon available on most windows, is context-sensitive and will take you straight to a related topic. If no related topic is found, you will be taken to this topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== WCS Maintenance Menus ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tasks Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDT Comms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
System Tools Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reports Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SD Maintenance Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print Selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Open Database ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: CTRL-O&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This command is not necessary if you are running the program from the WCS Server. It can be used to change the database that you are linking to, if multiple RDT systems are in use. Simply follow the prompts until the RDT database is found (it is usually called ‘rdt1.mdb’).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Print ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: CTRL-P&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option prints the selected window’s contents. If you have accessed this option from the icon, you will be prompted for confirmation, to prevent printing thousands of pages of data accidentally. If you have selected records from the active window, the button will work as the option Print Selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Print Selection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Print Selection ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option prints a selection of records from the selected window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Close Database ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: CTRL-W&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option closes down the currently opened database. You will be unable to use most of the functions if you do not open another database. The only options available to you when the database is closed are Repair Database and Compact Database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compact Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Exit ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: CTRL-Q&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option exits the WCS Maintenance program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cut&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Paste&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cut ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: CTRL-X&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cuts selected data to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Copy ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: CTRL-C&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copies selected data to the clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Paste ===&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: CTRL-V&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option pastes data from the clipboard to the selected area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tasks Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pallet Movement Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pick Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Picking Container Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deconsolidation Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Goods Receipt Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stock Take Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipment Packages Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shipment Pallets Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pallet Movement Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On start-up, you are presented with the Select Movements window. When data has been selected, you will be returned to this screen. All data from the movements screen that conforms to your selection criteria will be displayed. The window will display all the data that is required, and in a reasonable order, but this can be modified. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an icon bar on this screen, to aid you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new fields to or remove existing fields from the display, right-click on the grid header anywhere and select the option 'Field Chooser', or hit the appropriate icon on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of the fields in the grid, drag the required field to its new position and then release the mouse button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the way the data is sorted (the order the rows appears in the grid) in several ways. You can double-click on the column header to sort ascending on that field (low to high). You can then double click again on that field, and it will switch to descending (high to low). Double clicking again will remove the sort. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could also right-click on the required field header, and choose ascending, descending or none from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can sort on several fields at the same time by using one of the above methods on several of the fields, in the order you require. Each column will be marked to show that data has been sorted within it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Refresh' button can be used to re-find the data from the database, using your original selection criteria. This is useful if any changes have taken place on the data since you found it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reprioritisation of movements can be achieved by several methods. You can either reprioritise each line singly by right clicking and choosing re-prioritise line, or you can select several lines. This is done by using shift or control keys with the mouse click, then right-clicking and choosing 'Re-prioritise Selection' from the menu, or the corresponding button. Either way you will be taken to a screen to enter the new priority of the movement(s), then click OK. You will be shown the success or failure of the activity on a progress screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, the data will be re-displayed with the new elements in place and the WCS database will have been updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can remove a task from the list of available tasks by setting the task to Error status. This is different to holding the task, as held tasks can still block P&amp;amp;D locations - Error tasks won’t. Simply right-click on the task you want setting to error status and choose the Set Error option from the pop-up menu. The program will ask you for a reason - enter some descriptive text here. When OK is pressed, the task will have been set to error status and will be displayed in red. An audit record will have been written to the Exceptions log, visible by using the Exceptions Enquiry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to print out details of the movements in the list, either those selected or all the records in the list, use the print icon or options from the main WCS maintenance menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Supervisor options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are a supervisor user (defined against your user name in the Users Maintenance screen), you also have the option of deleting tasks from the database. Simply right-click on the task you want removing from the database and choose the Delete option from the pop-up menu. The program will ask you for a reason - enter some descriptive text here. When OK is pressed, the task will have been deleted from the database. An audit record will have been written to the Exceptions log, visible by using the Exceptions Enquiry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Data Window&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field Chooser&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miscellaneous&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Re-prioritise Entry Window&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On start-up, you are presented with the Select data window. When data has been selected, you will be returned to this screen. All data from the screen that conforms to your selection criteria will be displayed. The window will display all the data that is required, and in a reasonable order, but this can be modified. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an icon bar on this screen, to aid you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new fields to or remove existing fields from the display, right-click on the grid header anywhere and select the option 'Field Chooser', or hit the appropriate icon on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the position of the fields in the grid, drag the required field to its new position and then release the mouse button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the way the data is sorted (the order the rows appears in the grid) in several ways. You can double-click on the column header to sort ascending on that field (low to high). You can then double click again on that field, and it will switch to descending (high to low). Double clicking again will remove the sort. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could also right-click on the required field header, and choose ascending, descending or none from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can sort on several fields at the same time by using one of the above methods on several of the fields, in the order you require. Each column will be marked to show that data has been sorted within it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Refresh' button can be used to re-find the data from the database, using your original selection criteria. This is useful if any changes have taken place on the data since you found it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reprioritisation of data can be achieved by several methods. You can either reprioritise each line singly by right clicking and choosing re-prioritise line, or you can select several lines. This is done by using shift or control keys with the mouse click, then right-clicking and choosing 'Re-prioritise Selection' from the menu, or the corresponding button. Either way you will be taken to a screen to enter the new priority of the movement(s), then click OK. You will be shown the success or failure of the activity on a progress screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, the data will be re-displayed with the new elements in place, and the WCS database will have been updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can remove a task from the list of available tasks by setting the task to Error status. This is different to holding the task, as held tasks can still block P&amp;amp;D locations - Error tasks won’t. Simply right-click on the task you want setting to error status and choose the Set Error option from the pop-up menu. The program will ask you for a reason - enter some descriptive text here. When OK is pressed, the task will have been set to error status and will be displayed in red. An audit record will have been written to the Exceptions log, visible by using the Exceptions Enquiry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to print out details of the data in the list, either those selected or all the items in the list, use the print icon or options from the main WCS maintenance menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Picks are allocated to RDT users in groups and these groups are decided when the task is received from the WMS. To split a number of picks out of an existing group into a new group, select a number of picks in one group, then right-click and choose ‘Create Pick Group’. Alternatively, you can click on the icon on the icon bar. The picks will then be split into a new group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Picks in different groups cannot be put into a new group together. Additionally, pick tasks in progress will not be changed to a new group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Supervisor options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are a supervisor user (defined against your user name in the Users Maintenance screen), you also have the option of deleting tasks from the database. Simply right-click on the task you want removing from the database and choose the Delete option from the pop-up menu. The program will ask you for a reason - enter some descriptive text here. When OK is pressed, the task will have been deleted from the database. An audit record will have been written to the Exceptions log, visible by using the Exceptions Enquiry screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Data Window&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field Chooser&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miscellaneous&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Re-prioritise Entry Window&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Re-prioritise Entry Window ====&lt;br /&gt;
When you have chosen lines to re-prioritise, you will be taken to this dialogue window, to enter the new priority of the lines. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this is done, click OK. You will be shown the success or failure of the activity on a progress screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Goods Receipt Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to enquire on the Goods Receipt Preadvice file, showing all outstanding receiving tasks for the RDT users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form has two views, a detail/select view, and a grid view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Data cannot be modified on the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will start by prompting you for selection criteria to retrieve the data by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a character-based field (for example, stock code), the program will match all data that is similar. So, entering ‘A01’ in this field will match all stock codes that have the string ‘A01’ in them, like ‘A0101’, ‘AA012345’ or ‘B1763A01’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a numeric-based field (for example, quantity), the program will exactly match all data. So, entering ‘123’ in this field will match only records that have exactly 123 in quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a date-based field (for example, date from), the program will exactly match the date, or exactly match a date and time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates must be entered in the standard database date format, in this case ‘DD/MM/YY’. The ‘slash’ separator must be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date and time entries must be entered as ‘DD/MM/YY hh:mm:ss’. The ‘space’ between the date and time must be entered, as must the ‘colon’ separator on the time portion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Criteria may be entered from a lookup screen. This is available on fields with a ‘!’ button next to them. Simply press the lookup button to bring up a screen of all data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any number of criteria may be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once entered, press the ‘Find’ button to find data using the criteria entered. The screen will flip to the grid view, to show you all the data selected in a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the grid view, you can change the width of each of the data columns. The screen will not remember your setting when next you use the screen. You can sort the data by clicking on the column header. You can sort the data in reverse order by shift- or control-clicking on the item in the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can flip back to the detail view, by clicking on the appropriate tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection criteria can be added by pressing the ‘New Criteria’ button. This will blank the screen, and allow you to enter criteria for the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the criteria entered, use the ‘Amend Criteria’ button. This will blank the screen, and display the current selection criteria. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to remove all criteria during entry or amendment, press the ‘Clear Criteria’ button. This will remove all previously entered criteria, and start from a blank screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To re-find data based on the current selection criteria, press the ‘Refresh’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stock Take Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to enquire on the Stock Take file, showing all outstanding stock take tasks available to the RDT users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form has two views, a detail/select view, and a grid view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Data cannot be modified on the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will start by prompting you for selection criteria to retrieve the data by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a character-based field (for example, stock code), the program will match all data that is similar. So, entering ‘A01’ in this field will match all stock codes that have the string ‘A01’ in them, like ‘A0101’, ‘AA012345’ or ‘B1763A01’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a numeric-based field (for example, quantity), the program will exactly match all data. So, entering ‘123’ in this field will match only records that have exactly 123 in quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a date-based field (for example, date from), the program will exactly match the date, or exactly match a date and time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates must be entered in the standard database date format, in this case ‘DD/MM/YY’. The ‘slash’ separator must be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date and time entries must be entered as ‘DD/MM/YY hh:mm:ss’. The ‘space’ between the date and time must be entered, as must the ‘colon’ separator on the time portion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Criteria may be entered from a lookup screen. This is available on fields with a ‘!’ button next to them. Simply press the lookup button to bring up a screen of all data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any number of criteria may be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once entered, press the ‘Find’ button to find data using the criteria entered. The screen will flip to the grid view, to show you all the data selected in a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the grid view, you can change the width of each of the data columns. The screen will not remember your setting when next you use the screen. You can sort the data by clicking on the column header. You can sort the data in reverse order by shift- or control-clicking on the item in the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can flip back to the detail view, by clicking on the appropriate tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection criteria can be added by pressing the ‘New Criteria’ button. This will blank the screen, and allow you to enter criteria for the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the criteria entered, use the ‘Amend Criteria’ button. This will blank the screen, and display the current selection criteria. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to remove all criteria during entry or amendment, press the ‘Clear Criteria’ button. This will remove all previously entered criteria, and start from a blank screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To re-find data based on the current selection criteria, press the ‘Refresh’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shipment Packages Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Shipment Packages Enquiry screen allows the user to see the packages that are available for the RDT Shipment Pallet Building module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen starts by showing a filter, with a list of items that can be selected. The filter can be shown at any time by pressing the Filer option on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any search criteria here, and then press OK. The data will be refreshed, selecting only the data that matches the search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To refresh the data, press the refresh button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shipment Pallets Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Shipment Pallets Enquiry screen allows the user to see the pallets that have been built by the RDT Shipment Pallet Building module. These pallets will be available for Movement or Despatch, depending on the status of the pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen starts by showing a filter, with a list of items that can be selected. The filter can be shown at any time by pressing the Filer option on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any search criteria here, and then press OK. The data will be refreshed, selecting only the data that matches the search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To refresh the data, press the refresh button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Deconsolidation Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Deconsolidation Maintenance screen allows the user to see the stock that is ready for deconsolidation after picking. The screen also shows orders that are ready for despatch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows the status of the tasks to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen starts by showing a filter, with a list of items that can be selected. The filter can be shown at any time by pressing the Filer option on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any search criteria here, and then press OK. The data will be refreshed, selecting only the data that matches the search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To refresh the data, press the refresh button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows tasks to be held or released. Select one or multiple tasks on the grid, and then press the hold/release button on the toolbar. The screen will pop-up a selection box, asking you what task you want to perform, and a reason associated with it. This reason will be written to the Exceptions log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows tasks to have an error status set against them, or cleared. Select one or multiple tasks on the grid, and then press the Set/Clear Error button on the toolbar. The screen will pop-up a selection box, asking you what task you want to perform, and a reason associated with it. This reason will be written to the Exceptions log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Picking Container Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Picking Container Maintenance screen allows the user to see Picking Containers. The screen also shows orders that are ready for deconsolidation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows the status of the containers to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen starts by showing a filter, with a list of items that can be selected. The filter can be shown at any time by pressing the Filer option on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any search criteria here, and then press OK. The data will be refreshed, selecting only the data that matches the search criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To refresh the data, press the refresh button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows containers to be held or released. Select one or multiple containers on the grid, and then press the hold/release button on the toolbar. The screen will pop-up a selection box, asking you what task you want to perform, and a reason associated with it. This reason will be written to the Exceptions log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen allows containers to have an error status set against them, or cleared. Select one or multiple containers on the grid, and then press the Set/Clear Error button on the toolbar. The screen will pop-up a selection box, asking you what task you want to perform, and a reason associated with it. This reason will be written to the Exceptions log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pick Summary Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pick Summary screen allows the user to see a summary of all the picking tasks available in the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On entry, the screen will be in ‘data select’ mode. Data is selected by entering the owner of the orders and the route. You can select asterisk (*) from the drop-down lists to select all the owners or routes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the criteria have been selected, clicking the refresh button will display the selected data (‘Display’ mode) on a grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Should any of the records on the route/load be in error, the status will be “Error” and the background colour of the whole line will be red. The fore-colour will be in white. The text will be in '''bold.'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Should any of the records on the route/load be held, the status will be “Held” and the background colour of the whole line will be red. The fore-colour will be in white. The text will be in '''bold'''.&lt;br /&gt;
* Should any of the records on the route/load be in progress, the status will be “In Progress” and the text of the whole line will be displayed in green and '''bold'''.&lt;br /&gt;
* Otherwise, the records will be put in default black, with no bold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colouring on the line will be decided in the order displayed above. Therefore, if there are tasks held, and there are some in progress, the line will be displayed as if all lines are held.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grid allows single-line selection and re-sizing of columns and is scrollable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where multiple and different customer details are found for a load, ‘*’ (asterisk) is displayed in the Customer column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displays a status bar, showing the total number of outstanding tasks displayed in the grid. If no records are selected based on the criteria entered, the status bar will display “No records selected”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the record set, based on the selection criteria already entered. The grid will then be re-displayed based on the new data selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking the Select button will clear the grid and the screen will re-enter ‘Data Select’ mode and allow you to enter the selection criteria again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should you double-click on a line, the pick reprioritisation screen is displayed, showing the orders matching the route and load on the line chosen. This screen will then operate in the same way as the normal pick reprioritisation screen, but without allowing you to re-select data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Field Chooser ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen shows you the all the elements that you can display on the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the items displayed, check the box next to the fields you want to see, and uncheck those you don’t want to see (by left clicking). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the field chooser to modify a grid display, the grid display will change as you change the checks. When you have finished, close the window, with either the OK button, or just the ‘X’ in the top-right of the window. The CANCEL button will be greyed out - it is not necessary when the window is used in this way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the field chooser to select a layout for a selection template, click the OK button when you are satisfied with the display for the template. If you are not satisfied, click the cancel button, or the ‘X’ in the top-right of the window. The template will revert to the layout it had before you entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Select Data Window ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is used to select the data that you require to see on the main window. There are two tabs on this window, a normal tab and an advanced tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Topics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Data Window, Normal Tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Data Window, Advanced Tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Select Data Window, Normal Tab ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where standard selection criteria can be entered, to retrieve movement information from the database. This is the screen that you will be brought into first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of the criteria can be ranged or entered singly, based on the type of data that is held in each field. These can be of several types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Character type&lt;br /&gt;
* Numeric type&lt;br /&gt;
* Selection boxes&lt;br /&gt;
* Numeric type (Special)&lt;br /&gt;
* Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Validation exists for each type, so that if entry is incorrect, you will be informed of the correct way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standard selection criteria (and their selection types) are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
| Selection box, Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Owner&lt;br /&gt;
| Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock&lt;br /&gt;
| Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pallet&lt;br /&gt;
| Numeric type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Customer Pallet&lt;br /&gt;
| Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Priority&lt;br /&gt;
| Selection box, Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Source Location&lt;br /&gt;
| Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Destination Location&lt;br /&gt;
| Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Truck Type&lt;br /&gt;
| Selection Box, Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Date From&lt;br /&gt;
| Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Date To&lt;br /&gt;
| Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
For Movements, the following extra criteria are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Audit Number&lt;br /&gt;
| Numeric type (Special)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Line number&lt;br /&gt;
| Numeric type (Special)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Movement Type&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio buttons, Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
For Picks, the following extra criteria are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| Route Code&lt;br /&gt;
| Character Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Load Number&lt;br /&gt;
| Numeric Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
| Character Type (Special)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Page Number &lt;br /&gt;
| Numeric Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sequence Number&lt;br /&gt;
| Numeric Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Type&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Buttons, Character type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
When selection criteria are entered, clicking OK will select all information on movements in the database that conform to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Types&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Select Data Window, Advanced Tab ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the area where advanced selection criteria can be entered, to retrieve movement information from the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each item on the grid is a line of selection criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you switch to the advanced tab, any criteria you have entered on the normal tab will be entered automatically on this screen. This is so you can use the previous screen to enter the initial criteria easily, then fine-tune on the more complicated screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter new lines, you can double click the left mouse button on the indicated line, and you will be taken to a selection box, showing all the elements you can use to select with. You will then be allowed to enter any values with which to select. These values follow the standard selection type rules you would normally use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also right-click on any of the lines. This will allow you to insert a new line in this way. From the menu that pops up here, you can also edit the marked criteria, or delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather than entering selection criteria from scratch every time, it is possible to retrieve selection templates previously saved, and use them. To do this, click the ‘Save’ button. These may then be loaded using the ‘Load’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Standard wildcard operation is in effect for the elements whose type permit it (character).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ranges and lists are also permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selection criteria are entered, clicking OK will select all information on movements in the database that conform to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Selection Templates ====&lt;br /&gt;
This screen is available from the 'Advanced' tab of the Select Movements window. It allows you to create, retrieve, modify, save or delete templates for movement retrieval.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Templates allow you to save standard retrieval criteria for specific functions for later use, saving re-typing time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new template, simply add the selection criteria to the grid, in the same way as the advanced tab. When this has been entered, click the 'Save' button. You will then be prompted to save the template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To retrieve an existing template, click the 'Load' button. You will then be prompted to find your template. When you have selected your template, click 'OK'. The template will then be displayed on the screen, for editing or use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a retrieved template has been edited, you should save your template, either back to its original name or as a new template (using the 'Save' button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a template, use the Load Template window. You will not be asked to confirm your selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields can be left blank in the advanced criteria, and can be saved as such in the template file. You will not, however be able to use the blank templates until valid data has been entered for them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Selection Types ====&lt;br /&gt;
Selection types encompass the entry methods of the different types of fields, and what entries may be allowed in this type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Types, Character Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Types, Numeric Type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Types, Selection Box/Radio Buttons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Types, Numeric Type (Special)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Selection Types, Character Type ====&lt;br /&gt;
When entering single selections or ranges, field must be surrounded by '&amp;quot;' (Double Quote).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters entered as range delimited by '-' (Hyphen).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters entered singly delimited by ',' (Comma).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wildcards may be used in this type. So, an asterisk (*) may be used to signify many or no characters, and a question mark (?) may be used to signify a single character. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If using wildcards, you may be required to end the string with an asterisk. This is to account for possible trailing spaces. The exception to this is the Special derivative of Character types. In this instance, the asterisk is always assumed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a single owner ABC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter “ABC” in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting 2 owners, ABC and XYZ:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter “ABC”,”XYZ” in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a range of owners from AAA to CCC:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter “AAA”-“CCC” in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting multiples of the above:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“AAA”-“CCC”,“XYZ”,“YYY”-“ZZZ”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
will select any owners in the range AAA to CCC, any between YYY and ZZZ and the owner XYZ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Selection Types, Numeric Type ====&lt;br /&gt;
Numbers entered as range delimited by '-' (Hyphen).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numbers entered singly delimited by ',' (Comma).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a single pallet 00008132&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter 8132 in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting 2 pallets, 00008132 and 00020001:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter 8132,20001 in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a range of pallets from 00000200 to 00005000:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter 200-5000 in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting multiples of the above:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
200-5000,8132,10000-10500&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
will select any pallets in the range 00000200 to 00005000, any between 00010000 and 00010500 and the pallet 00008132.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Selection Types, Numeric Type (Special) ====&lt;br /&gt;
In cases like this, special validation may limit entry of ranges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audit Number/ Line number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, a range of audit numbers may be entered, or a range of audit numbers with a single line number, or a single audit number with a range of line numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a single pallet 00008132&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter 8132 in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting 2 pallets, 00008132 and 00020001:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter 8132,20001 in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a range of pallets from 00000200 to 00005000:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter 200-5000 in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting multiples of the above:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
200-5000,8132,10000-10500&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
will select any pallets in the range 00000200 to 00005000, any between 00010000 and 00010500 and the pallet 00008132.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Selection Types, Selection Box/Radio Buttons ====&lt;br /&gt;
Data in fields like this will allow standard entry based on the selection types above, but will also allow you to select single values from a pop-up list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radio buttons will allow you to select from a fixed list of values. Only one of these may be selected at one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For advanced criteria, these items act similarly to character type selection, and will appear as such in the list of criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== RDT Comms ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Current Exceptions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employee Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Messages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Employee Activity ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Employees Analysis window shows a constantly updated list of all the RDTs available on the WCS system, showing their status. The window you are shown initially shows you:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The RDT ID&lt;br /&gt;
* The employee code&lt;br /&gt;
* A brief description of their activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will display RDT users with activities older than 10 minutes at the top of the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT ID is the WCS’s identifier for the RDT. This is included for reporting and system purposes only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The employee code is from the standing data table on the WCS server. It is updated continually from the WMS table. The RDT user enters this when they log on to their RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The activity description shows the current task in which the RDT is engaged. The description can be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt - receiving pallets into the warehouse from a pre-advised Goods Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pick - picking pallets for advised sales orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* Replenishment - replenishing pick faces from bulk locations.&lt;br /&gt;
* Putaway - Taking pallets from receipt bays to their designated place in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
* Movement - Moving a pallet from one area to another.&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Take - involved in an advised stock take cycle count.&lt;br /&gt;
* Marshalling - marshalling a sales order load.&lt;br /&gt;
* Loading - Loading a sales order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Disconnected - the RDT is not connected to the WCS server.&lt;br /&gt;
* Idle - not involved in any of the above activities.&lt;br /&gt;
* Error - a system error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status ‘Idle’ simply shows that the RDT is not linked to an activity that is part of the current functionality. The RDT may well be performing different activities (ad hoc moves, pallet enquiry, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status ‘Error’ shows that the RDT may not be communicating correctly with the WCS server, but still has a job outstanding against it. The system is designed to self-correct these errors in most instances, but manual intervention may be required. These error lines will be displayed in red, indicating that there may be a problem. To force the system to clear these problem users, right-click on the affected user and choose Clear Locks from the pop-up menu. The system will then clear any tasks the user may have locked, releasing them to the general pool of tasks once more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find more information about the current activity of any particular RDT, double-click the left mouse button on the appropriate line. This will take you to the Employee Analysis - Detail window. Alternatively, right-click on the item, and choose Display Details from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen is kept updated at all times every few seconds. This means that the most up-to-date information about your RDT users is at your fingertips at all times. The window can be re-sized, as can the width of the grid rows, to keep all information on the screen at all times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Detail Window&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Detail Window ====&lt;br /&gt;
This window gives you more detail on the selected line. The window shows you:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The Employee code and their registered name.&lt;br /&gt;
* A short description of the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
* A detailed description of the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Current Exceptions ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Exceptions window shows any tasks completed, but with exceptions. Exceptions include such things as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Repositioning a movement or putaway&lt;br /&gt;
* Cancelling a movement, replenishment or putaway&lt;br /&gt;
* Changing the quantity on a pick&lt;br /&gt;
* Cancelling a pick, or picking to zero&lt;br /&gt;
* Exchanging pallets on pick, movements or replenishments&lt;br /&gt;
* Any Ad-hoc movement&lt;br /&gt;
* Setting a task to Error status&lt;br /&gt;
* Deleting a task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any of these events take place, a message is shown on the exceptions screen immediately, showing the employee, the RDT, a brief description of the error and a date and time. The window shows only exceptions within a specified time period. Double clicking on the line will give you greater detail about the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Detail Window&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Messages ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to send messages to RDT users who are logged on. The list of logged-on RDT users is kept updated at all times, making sure that the users you are sending a message to are always correct. If a user connects or disconnects from the Wireless network, you will be informed on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your message in the text box provided. You must enter a message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pick the users to whom you wish to send a message. The list shows the entire network, including registered companies, warehouses and users. You can pick users individually, or send messages to an entire warehouse, company or the whole network. Either click on your chosen recipient and click the ‘add’ (-&amp;gt;) button, or simply drag the intended recipient to the recipients list. Double clicking on a user will give you some information about their current activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the intended recipients have been chosen, simply click the ‘send’ button. You will be informed of the progress of the message, and its completion. Messages will appear on RDT terminals when the user next exits a function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get a message to a user quicker, set the urgent flag on this screen. The RDT user will then pick up the message the next time they press the ‘Enter’ key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Tools Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Re-logon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
System Settings &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear out Error log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear out Incoming/Outgoing log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear out WCS Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear Out Deleted Items&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Incoming Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outgoing Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Error Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Compact Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Change Warehouse ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to set and change the company code and warehouse id, for the enquiry and movement priority screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can blank the company and warehouse here - this will allow you to view the data for all companies and warehouses on the current database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clear Out Deleted Items ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option will clear out any items in the database marked for deletion, but not yet deleted. Tasks such as these would be created if the database is set not to delete tasks, or if Maintenance users have deleted tasks using the Pallet Movement Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCS Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clear out Error log ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option will clear down the error log, obeying the user-entered clear-down settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clear out Incoming/Outgoing log ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option will clear down the incoming and outgoing logs, obeying the user-entered clear-down settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clear out WCS Database ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option will clear down the entire WCS database, leaving only standing data untouched, obeying the user-entered clear-down settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Incoming Log ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to view the log of all incoming data to the WCS server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the data, simply click on the title of the column you want sorted. The data will automatically sort in this order. To sort the data in reverse order, hold down the Shift key when you click on the column title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outgoing Log ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to view the log of all outgoing data from the WCS server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the data, simply click on the title of the column you want sorted. The data will automatically sort in this order. To sort the data in reverse order, hold down the Shift key when you click on the column title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Error Log ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to view the error log for operations on the WCS server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the data, simply click on the title of the column you want sorted. The data will automatically sort in this order. To sort the data in reverse order, hold down the Shift key when you click on the column title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Compact Database ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option compresses the WCS database. It is a necessary requirement of SQL databases that this option be present. It can only be run if the database is closed. Close the database using the appropriate button, or choosing ‘Close Database’ from the ‘File’ menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== System Settings  ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option brings up a multiple panel window for maintaining system options. The tabs available are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rules, consisting of:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCS Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Admin Defaults&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear out Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Message Types&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maintenance Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rules Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCS Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to modify the communication settings. The content of this form changes, depending on which WMS system you are linking to. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the system is connecting using socket connections, the following details will be shown:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* WMS IP Address - This is the IP address of the WMS machine. It is in the standard telnet layout (4 numbers, separated by full stops.&lt;br /&gt;
* WMS -&amp;gt; WCS Local Port - This is the port that the WCS listens to for communications from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCS -&amp;gt; WMS Remote Port - This is the port that the WMS listens to for communications from the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the system being linked to is using Oracle Advanced Queues, the following options can be changed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Oracle Database Name&lt;br /&gt;
* User&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings common to both connection systems that may be modified are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* RDT -&amp;gt; WCS Local Port - This is the port that the WCS listens to for communications from RDTs.&lt;br /&gt;
* RDT Waiting Time - This is the amount of time that the RDT will wait before re-trying communications.&lt;br /&gt;
* WMS -&amp;gt; WCS Re-Try Limit - This is the amount of times the WCS will try to send a message to the WMS, if the message has been refused, before logging the error and trying the next.&lt;br /&gt;
* Default Company Code - This is the default company code that the RDT will log on to.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enable Hold Priority - This allows the lowest priority in the WCS to be used as a Held status. When this option is checked, and tasks on priority 9 will not be allocated to RDTs to complete. To release the tasks, re-prioritise the task to a higher level.&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete records - When this option is checked, completed tasks are deleted from the WCS database. All logging is still in place. When un-checked, the completed tasks are marked for deletion by the cleardown process.&lt;br /&gt;
* Window Caption - this field changes the displayed name of the WCS Server process, when running. This is useful when running multiple systems on one site or one server.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCS Logging database - When this option is checked, you will be prompted to enter a location for the logging database. THIS OPTION MUST NOT BE CHANGED IF THE WCS SERVER IS RUNNING. When this is done, the logging files in the normal database are no longer used - a new database will be created in the defined area and the WCS server will begin all logging to this database instead. All options in the WCS that use these logging files will now use the new database instead. The logging files are:&lt;br /&gt;
** Error log&lt;br /&gt;
** Incoming log&lt;br /&gt;
** Outgoing log&lt;br /&gt;
** RDT Activities&lt;br /&gt;
** Exceptions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N.B. Changing these settings may affect the running of the WCS server. If you are not sure of the consequences of your actions, telephone the support team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Clear out Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to enter the settings to control the clear-down options above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are prompted to enter the log directory, where details of the clear down’s success will be written.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each clearable dataset, you can specify whether the clear down program will process this type, and the number of day’s data you wish to keep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The datasets are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Database - Any tasks not actioned within the period specified will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* Log Archive - The logs of previous clear down runs.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exceptions - Exception events raised from RDT actions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Activities - Activity journals of each RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
* Deleted Records - Any records marked as deleted (See WCS Settings tab)&lt;br /&gt;
* Incoming Log - The next three are cleared for the same period. They are the logs of all transmissions in the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
* Outgoing Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Error log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Admin Defaults ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a user logs on to this program (WCS Maintenance) without having a group set for them, this screen maintains the options available for the user to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of available modules is shown each with a tick or cross against the module. A tick designates that the module is available, a cross, unavailable. Either double clicking on the item or right clicking, then selecting the appropriate availability can change the options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Groups Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Owners Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Maintenance Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to maintain locations and lists for files used specifically by this program. The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Default Criteria Templates Folder - Criteria files for use in the Reprioritisation screens.&lt;br /&gt;
* Default Report Files Folder - Compiled reports.&lt;br /&gt;
* Default Reports Folder - Text files saved from reports will be saved here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these options includes a browse button, to allow you to pick the area Explorer-style. Each also has a default area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A recent file list is displayed, showing all the WCS databases accessed by the program. The initial screen uses this when logging on the program. This can be switched off by un-checking the ‘Show File List At Startup’ box. To clear the list, press the ‘Clear List’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Templates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run Report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View Report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Message Types ====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows you to maintain the queue settings for Oracle systems. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Incoming Queue&lt;br /&gt;
* Agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the queues available in the WMS should be set here, using the grid provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reports Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run Report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View Report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Run Report ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option shows you a screen of all registered reports in the WCS system. Double clicking on a report name will run the selection criteria screen. This allows you to enter the required criteria to select data for the report. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a default company and warehouse, and the report requires these for selection, they will already be set to your defaults, otherwise they will be set to ‘*’ (asterisk), the wildcard character. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to select all the data for that criterion, simply enter the wildcard character at the prompt. All fields can be set to the wildcard character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates can be defaulted using the wildcard character, or set in a different way. If you enter ‘+’ (plus) and then a number, the date entered will be the number of days specified added to today’s date e.g. +15 will ad 15 days to today’s date. You can also enter ‘-‘ (minus) to take days away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all criteria have been entered, the report will be run using the default report destination parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on a report will allow you to change the selection criteria and the destination parameters of the report, if the report writing option is available in your version of the WCS. Right clicking on an empty area of the window will allow you to create a new WCS report, if the report writing option is available in your version of the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== View Report ===&lt;br /&gt;
View report allows you to see any reports saved as files. The WCS will edit the report in the Windows editor associated to the report type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SD Maintenance Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
Menu Items:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Groups Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Owners Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aisles Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
P&amp;amp;D Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDT ID Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Printers Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location Truck Checker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activities Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exceptions Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Truck Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reason Code Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pallet Type Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update Truck Moves Seq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Users Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the Users Maintenance screen. This allows you to maintain system settings per user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users are partially maintained by the WMS, sending data records when an employee is added or deleted. The data sent by the WMS includes the company and warehouse, the employee ID, the description and the shift number. These can all be changed on this screen if desired. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A toolbar is included on the screen for ease of use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to create a password for the user, if required, and create a link to a set of system parameters, via a group ID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen automatically displays all the employees for your default company and warehouse. Changing your company and warehouse will close this screen. When it is next opened, it will display details on your new default company and warehouse. The Refresh button will also check for the new company code and warehouse id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lookup is provided for groups, so that you can pick your required group from the list. Once selected, a description is displayed for reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to see the set-up of the group you have chosen, press the Edit Group button. You will be taken to the Groups Maintenance screen. You will only be shown the group you have chosen. You can make changes here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find an existing record, press the find button on the toolbar. You will be taken to a lookup screen. Once you have selected your user, the data will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate to other users sequentially, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the screen. The status bar will show you which record you are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have found a user, you may wish to change some parts of it. Simply click on your chosen field and edit it. Once you have made all your changes, press the save or OK button to save your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‘Works Only in Aisle’: These parameters affect the areas the user is given tasks, when operating System-directed tasks in the bulk areas. These will act as defaults for the user, or their defined range, depending on certain warehouse flags.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Supervisor check box allows the user some additional functionality within the maintenance functions - see Pallet Movement Maintenance for details. It also allows the user to clear locked users in some RDT screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Access Type shows how the user is able to log on to the system - admin and/or RDT. This can be modified, and will take effect the next time the user logs on. Logged on shows how the user is currently logged on to the system. This can be reset using the reset button. N.B. this directly affects the users. USE WITH CARE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Groups Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Groups Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the Groups Maintenance screen. This allows you to maintain system settings for use on the Users Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users are partially maintained by the WMS, sending data records when an employee is added or deleted. The data sent by the WMS includes the company and warehouse, the employee ID, the description and the shift number. You can add system settings to a user, using the Group ID reference field. This links to records you can maintain in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The group contains switches to show which users are allowed to use which functions. As such, the screen allows you to enter a unique group id, and a description of the group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The explorer shows all the rules that apply at this level. To change a value, simply find the rule you wish to change and change the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A toolbar is included on the screen for ease of use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new records, press the new button on the toolbar. Once you have entered your new group, press the save button or OK button. Your data will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find an existing record, press the find button on the toolbar. You will be taken to a lookup screen. Once you have selected your group, the data will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate to other groups sequentially, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the screen. The status bar will show you which record you are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have found a group, you may wish to change some parts of it. Simply click on your chosen field and edit it. Once you have made all your changes, press the save or OK button to save your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a record, press the delete button on the toolbar, then confirm through the popup dialogue. You will only be allowed to delete groups records that are not currently in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rules Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Warehouse Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to modify the system and default user settings of the Warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen has several tabs, allowing you to modify settings affecting different broad areas of the system:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a description of the contents of the various settings that can be changed, loosely grouped by area, with some additional elements in greater detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters that affect the way the system runs for the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Action Password’ is prompted for whenever any modules are password-protected on the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Aisle, Bay and Level lengths are used by the WCS to extract the data correctly from the location codes, so that the system can decide how to prioritise the tasks in the warehouse. These must replicate the values on the WMS, or the system will become unreliable when sending users to the next task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‘Task Identifier’ controls how the RDT identifies individual pallets in the warehouse. The values are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By Stock Code - the RDT modules will prompt for Location Code, Owner and Stock code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By Customer’s Pallet Id - The RDT modules will prompt for Owner and Customer’s Pallet Id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By System Pallet Id - The RDT modules will prompt for the WMS System Pallet Id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Check Digits’ flag controls how the user identified that they are at a particular location. The RDT will either prompt for the user to scan or enter Check Digits for each location (enabled), scan or enter the location code (disabled) or either scan the location code or enter the check digits (Combo Check).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Move Efficient’ flag controls how tasks are assigned to each user in the warehouse. This is either by Priority/Location sequence, or simple by location sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Block Stack’ flag controls whether pallets may be exchanged for others in the same location in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Exchange Replen’ flag controls whether, if the warehouse is set as Block Stack, whether replenishment moves can also be exchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Allow Task Exchange’ flag controls whether the WCS looks for outstanding tasks in the WCS database before requesting the WMS to exchange a pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Seamless Exchange’ flag controls whether the user must request to exchange a pallet with the Error key, or whether the exchange occurs seamlessly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Mixed Stock’ flag controls whether the WCS allows pallets of mixed stock in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‘Customer Pallet No’ controls whether the RDT system will prompt for Customer Pallet Ids for pallets held in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘WCS Generate Replenishment’ flag controls whether the WCS attempts to generate select replenishments via an Ad Hoc Move, or whether the WMS will reply with a move instead. Note: This should be left as enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘RDT Pop-up description’ flag controls whether the RDT automatically pops up a description of the Stock upon receipt and pick. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‘Measure Quantity’ and ‘Weights’ control whether the system prompts for Measure Quantities or Weights for pallets in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Multi-UOM processing’ flag control whether the RDT prompts for cases and units.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flags ‘Pallet Enquiry Print Labels’ and ‘WCS Pallet Enquiry Label Format’ rules control whether the RDT pallet enquiry function is allowed to print labels, and what label format to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''RDT Modules'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default modules allowed to RDT users, if the users are not assigned to a group. Please note: Some of these modules are bespoke and require certain WMS system set-up to be enabled. Please check your documentation as to which modules should be enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Receipt'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters that affect the running of a Receipt module in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Receipt Type’ flag governs how the RDT Receipt module works on the RDT. ‘Check Receipt’ is used when the receipts are advised to a pallet detail level, and ‘Blind Receipt’ is when the receipts are advised to a stock detail level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Selection Type’ flag governs how the RDT prompts for the Receipt you are receiving stock against. You can either enter the WMS reference (By GRN number) or the supplier’s reference (By Advice Note).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘RDT Damages’ flag allows RDT Receipt users to specify stock as damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Enter WMS Rotation’ flag allows the user to enter WMS Rotation during Goods Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Default Pallet Type’ flag controls whether the RDT prompts for a default pallet type to assign to all the pallets being received on a GRN in one session. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Enter Receipt Type’ flag controls whether the RDT user must enter a valid Receipt Type for the GRN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Echo Putaway Location’ flag controls whether the RDT receipt process displays the location to which the pallet will be located, after the pallet is received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Print Labels’ flag controls where/if pallet labels are printed during the receipt process. If the WCS is printing receipt labels, the flag ‘WCS Receipt Label Format’ defines the format being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Additional Pallets’ flag governs whether the RDT Receipt module allows the user to enter pallets that have not been advised by the WMS. This only affects Receipts that have been advised to a pallet detail level (Check Receipts).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Single Scan Entry’ flag governs whether the RDT Receipt process prompts for a single barcode scan when adding additional pallets. Please Note: As the single barcode can be in many formats for clients, this feature should only be enabled if the WCS has been modified to work with your Single Barcode format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next comes a number of validation checks that can be performed during RDT Goods Receipt. Those flags are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt Pallet Count Check - The action the RDT is to take when the number of pallets received for a stock code is exceeded.&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt Total Qty Stock Check - The action the RDT is to take when the total quantity of a stock code received is exceeded.&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt Standard Qty Check (Stock) - The action the RDT is to take when a stock code is received with a non-standard pallet quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt Pallet Qty Check (Pallet) - The action the RDT is to take when a pallet is received with a quantity that is not that preadvised. This supersedes the previous check.&lt;br /&gt;
* Receipt Non-Advised Stock - The action the RDT is to take when the user attempts to receive a stock code that was not preadvised.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The flags can have several values assigned to them, with different effects:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* No Check - No action taken.&lt;br /&gt;
* Informational Message - A message is displayed on the RDT, but the user is allowed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* Error - A message is displayed on the RDT and the user is not allowed to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
* Authorisation Required - A message is displayed on the RDT. The user is then required to obtain authorisation from a supervisor user to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Enter Eurodate’ flag controls whether the user can enter a Eurodate instead of a manufacture date during the Receipt process. The ‘Enter Dates’ flag must also be enabled for this flag to work. Please Note: Only some Eurodate formats are supported. Ensure yours are before enabling this flag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Enter Layers’ flag controls whether the RDT Receipt process prompts for the user to enter number of layers and loose cases on a pallet, rather than just the number of cases. Please Note: The WMS must be set up to allow the entry of layers, and to send the data to the WCS when the receipt is preadvised. If not, this flag should be disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Putaway/Moves'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Multi-pallet Putaway’ flag governs whether the RDT putaway process allows the user to scan more than one pallet to locate at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Enable Extended Reposition Validation’ is an extended check added to putaways when the pallets are being repositioned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Request Putaway Details at Scan’ flag controls whether the RDT putaway process requests a location for the pallet at the time of scanning by the putaway driver, rather than when the pallet is received. Please Note: The WMS’s putaway algorithm must support this type of processing for this flag to be enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Reposition’ and ‘Cancellation’ flags control whether the RDT is allowed to reposition or cancel Move tasks in the warehouse. These functions can be password-protected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pick/Post Picking Activities'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters that affect the running of a Pick module in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Pick By’ flag controls what the RDT prompts for as confirmation that the correct item has been found for picking. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Continuous Part Picking’ flag controls whether the user is allowed to continue picking cases of other stock codes on to the same despatch pallet. If enabled, the user is prompted whether the pallet should be taken to the marshalling location, or to continue to the next case pick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Pick Into Containers’ flag controls whether RDT Part Picking prompts for Picking Container IDs when part-picking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Lost Label’ flag controls whether the user is allowed to confirm a picked pallet by visually checking the details of the pallet (stock code, batch, etc), rather than simply scanning the palled ID or stock code. This is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‘Pick Location Error’ allows the user to cancel a Part Pick when they reach the pick location, before they are told to pick the pallet. This is to allow for damaged pick faces where stock is unavailable. This functionality can be password-protected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Residual Stock Balance Enquiry’ flag controls whether the WCS checks the available quantity on the WMS pallet record at the time of picking, to ensure that the most up-to-date information is available to the picker at all times. This option can be password-protected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the ‘Use WMS Rotation’ rule is set, wherever Customer Batch is displayed or entered during Picking or Deconsolidation, the RDT will display or request the entry of WMS Rotation instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Picker Replens’ flag controls whether the RDT user is allowed to pick up the replenishment move to the pick face for the pick they are currently completing. This functionality is not compatible with Pick Dependencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Pick Dependencies’ flag controls whether Part Picks are available to the pickers if a corresponding replenishment move is on the WCS. If enabled, the pick is not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Replen Dependency’ flag controls whether the WCS allows only one move into a specific location to be available to RDT users at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Pick In Sequence’ rule controls the sequence orders are released for picking. This is based on the Drop sequence, interfaced from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Pick Page Allocation’ flag controls how the WCS allocates Part Pick tasks to the users. ‘By Aisle’ means that the users are given tasks for an aisle for the current order or load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‘Concurrent Picks’ controls whether the RDT Part Picking module allows the users to pick several orders or loads at the same time. This functionality has been enabled for use when Loads are being picked rather than Orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Lock Pick Header’ flag controls whether the RDT Full pallet picking option locks all picks for his area to him, or whether it would allow many users to access these picks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Consolidation Group’ flag controls how the stock is consolidated during part picking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Force Sky Picking’ rule controls whether part pick tasks from bulk area treated as sky picks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Print Despatch Labels’ flag controls whether the WCS prints labels for the stock picked in the Part Picking module. The format used for the labels is defined in the ‘WCS Despatch Label Format’ field following. Clicking on the button shows an ‘Open File’ dialogue, allowing you to pick the format required. The format will have been created by OBS specifically for your use. The time when these labels are printed is controlled by the ‘Pick Label Prompt’ rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘User Select Pick Location’ rule controls whether the user is allowed to specify the location from which to start picking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Deconsolidation Method’ flag controls whether Deconsolidation tasks are processed by the WCS. The rule ‘Ad Hoc Deconsolidation’ controls whether deconsolidation tasks are sequenced manually or automatically by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Loading Method’ flag controls whether the warehouse is loading pallets after picking, and the method by which loading is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Dual Cycling'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parameters that affect the running of Dual Cycling in the warehouse, and whether it is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‘Enable Dual Cycling’ enables the use of Dual Cycling in the warehouse. If the flag is enabled, other modules are made available to RDT users that interleave tasks in the most efficient way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘NADC Crossover Method’ flag controls how the RDT crosses over to another narrow aisle when in Narrow Aisle Dual Cycling (NADC). The values are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual - The RDT user chooses when to change aisle.&lt;br /&gt;
* Threshold - the RDT crosses over to complete moves higher than the threshold priority (‘NADC Threshold Priority’)&lt;br /&gt;
* Weighting - Future development - should not be enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Send Aisle Status’ flag governs whether the WCS informs the WMS when Aisles are currently occupied with Trucks. For some systems, this can affect which locations are suggested for putaway. This message is only sent if the aisles are designated as Narrow Aisles, a parameter entered on Aisles Maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘NADC Aisle Lock’ rule controls the point at which an aisle is locked to prevent other RDTs using the aisle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘RDT DC Aisle Selection’ flag controls whether an RDT user is allowed to select the aisle range in which to work when using Narrow Aisle Dual Cycling. If the flag is enabled, the user is prompted for an aisle range in which to work. This range will default to the values entered against the user’s Employee Id on the Users Maintenance screen. If the flag is disabled, the user will not be given the opportunity to change their allocated range. In this instance, a range must be entered for the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘NADC Skip Putaway’ flag controls whether an RDT NADC user is allowed to skip a putaway move and go straight back to picking from the aisle again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other flags on this screen are either for system use only, or are for future development. These should not be changed unless specifically instructed to do so by the OBS team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Default Locations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some default locations used by the system in some modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can modify values on each tab by clicking on the relevant tab and changing the values in the required fields. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To choose the warehouse you want to look at or change, use the scrollbar on the bottom of the form to navigate to the record you want, or click on the lookup icon on the toolbar. This will display a screen of all the warehouses set up in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can get the data from the database again by clicking on the refresh button on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have completed changing the values, save the data by clicking on the Save button on the toolbar. It is not necessary to save changes in between moving from tab to tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bespoke'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bespoke rules have been created for sites to control specific functionality for those sites only and are unlikely to be used anywhere else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
‘Bespoke Site Rule’ is a broad rule used to control the various site-specific rules created in the past under one value. The value of this rule is normally the company or site running the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Bespoke Kraft Batch’ rule controls extraction of batch data for Kraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Pick by Carton’ functionality replaces certain parts of the normal part picking functionality, by requiring the user to scan a stock code on each individual carton, as they are placed on the despatch pallet. This functionality requires many parameters to be set up for the warehouse, and must be enabled only by the WCS support team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Encoded Sell-by dates’ flag controls whether sell-by dates are entered encoded into the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Allow Overpicking’ rule allows RF users to pick more than the requested amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘Batch Delivery’ flag enables some processing to link to a bespoke delivery system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aisles Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rules Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barcode Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Owners Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to see the owners set up on the system, flags specific to the Owner, plus any rules set up for the Owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This maintenance form works very similarly to the Warehouses maintenance. All warehouse rules are replicated at an Owner level. Therefore, please see the warehouses maintenance section to see a description of the rules maintained. Any specific Owner rules and screen-specific functionality is listed in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up rules for an Owner, the Owner must be set to Restrictive. This means that only certain members of the workforce can work for this Owner, as they will be allowed to operate in a different way to the rest of the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Owner is set to Restrictive, rules will be generated and you will be allowed to modify them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An owner that is not restrictive inherits the rules of the warehouse. Therefore, any RDT users working for owners that are non-restrictive will get their settings from the Warehouse they logged in as, not the Owner. Additionally, they will also be given work to complete for other non-restrictive Owners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rules Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barcode Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Barcode Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows the users to define what barcodes will be extracted from UCC/EAN-128 barcodes at receipt of pallets into the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the items required and save using the button provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Owners Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aisles Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to modify or add aisles for the warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new records, press the new button on the toolbar. Once you have entered your new aisle, press the save button or OK button. Your data will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find an existing record, press the find button on the toolbar. You will be taken to a lookup screen. Once you have selected your aisle, the data will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate to other aisles sequentially, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the screen. The status bar will show you which record you are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have found an aisle, you may wish to change some parts of it. Simply click on your chosen field and edit it. Some fields have lookups enabled on them, denoted by the ‘!’ button to the right. Just click on this item to see a list of compatible data to enter here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If aisle sequences or certain parameters are changed, the program will re-calculate the order of tasks in the warehouse for you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have made all your changes, press the save or OK button to save your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update Truck Moves Seq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== P&amp;amp;D Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to modify or add P&amp;amp;Ds for the warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new records, press the new button on the toolbar. Once you have entered your new P&amp;amp;D press the save button or OK button. Your data will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find an existing record, press the find button on the toolbar. You will be taken to a lookup screen. Once you have selected your P&amp;amp;D, the data will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate to other P&amp;amp;D’s sequentially, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the screen. The status bar will show you which record you are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have found a P&amp;amp;D, you may wish to change some parts of it. Simply click on your chosen field and edit it. Once you have made all your changes, press the save or OK button to save your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To recalculate the number of pallets actually at the P&amp;amp;D, click the Recalculate button. You will be asked to confirm your selection. There is no need to save the data once recalculated, as the program will do this automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== RDT ID Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to modify RDT Ids in the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find an existing record, press the find button on the toolbar. You will be taken to a lookup screen. Once you have selected your aisle, the data will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate to other records sequentially, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the screen. The status bar will show you which record you are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have found a record, you may wish to change some parts of it. Simply click on your chosen field and edit it. Once you have made all your changes, press the save button or OK button to save your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a record, press the delete button on the toolbar, then confirm through the popup dialogue. You will only be allowed to delete RDT records that are not currently in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Printers Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the Printers maintenance screen. This allows you to change the name associated to a network printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Printers can be either networked windows printers, or direct TVP/IP connections. The screen allows entry of either type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A toolbar is included on the screen for ease of use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new records, press the new button on the toolbar. Once you have entered your new printer, press the save button or OK button. Your data will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find an existing record, press the find button on the toolbar. You will be taken to a lookup screen. Once you have selected your printer, the data will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate to other printers sequentially, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the screen. The status bar will show you which record you are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have found a printer, you may wish to change some parts of it. Simply click on your chosen field and edit it. Once you have made all your changes, press the save or OK button to save your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a record, press the delete button on the toolbar, then confirm through the popup dialogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test a connection to a TCP/IP printer using the test connections and test file buttons. You may also identify block markers and characters for the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Location Truck Checker ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to check which trucks are available to move between specified location types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a location type on the two boxes. Once you have chosen your location types to check, click the Check button. This will show you the compatible trucks between the two location types. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activities Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to enquire on the RDT Activities file, showing all tasks completed by RDT users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form has two views, a detail/select view, and a grid view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Data cannot be modified on the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will start by prompting you for selection criteria to retrieve the data by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a character-based field (for example, stock code), the program will match all data that is similar. So, entering ‘A01’ in this field will match all stock codes that have the string ‘A01’ in them, like ‘A0101’, ‘AA012345’ or ‘B1763A01’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a numeric-based field (for example, quantity), the program will exactly match all data. So, entering ‘123’ in this field will match only records that have exactly 123 in quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a date-based field (for example, date from), the program will exactly match the date, or exactly match a date and time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates must be entered in the standard database date format, in this case ‘DD/MM/YY’. The ‘slash’ separator must be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date and time entries must be entered as ‘DD/MM/YY hh:mm:ss’. The ‘space’ between the date and time must be entered, as must the ‘colon’ separator on the time portion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Criteria may be entered from a lookup screen. This is available on fields with a ‘!’ button next to them. Simply press the lookup button to bring up a screen of all data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any number of criteria may be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once entered, press the ‘Find’ button to find data using the criteria entered. The screen will flip to the grid view, to show you all the data selected in a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the grid view, you can change the width of each of the data columns. The screen will not remember your setting when next you use the screen. You can sort the data by clicking on the column header. You can sort the data in reverse order by shift- or control-clicking on the item in the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can flip back to the detail view, by clicking on the appropriate tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection criteria can be added by pressing the ‘New Criteria’ button. This will blank the screen, and allow you to enter criteria for the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the criteria entered, use the ‘Amend Criteria’ button. This will blank the screen, and display the current selection criteria. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to remove all criteria during entry or amendment, press the ‘Clear Criteria’ button. This will remove all previously entered criteria, and start from a blank screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To re-find data based on the current selection criteria, press the ‘Refresh’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Exceptions Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
This screen allows you to enquire on the Exceptions file, showing all tasks completed with exceptions by RDT users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form has two views, a detail/select view, and a grid view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Data cannot be modified on the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will start by prompting you for selection criteria to retrieve the data by.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a character-based field (for example, stock code), the program will match all data that is similar. So, entering ‘A01’ in this field will match all stock codes that have the string ‘A01’ in them, like ‘A0101’, ‘AA012345’ or ‘B1763A01’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a numeric-based field (for example, quantity), the program will exactly match all data. So, entering ‘123’ in this field will match only records that have exactly 123 in quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the item being entered is a date-based field (for example, date from), the program will exactly match the date, or exactly match a date and time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates must be entered in the standard database date format, in this case ‘DD/MM/YY’. The ‘slash’ separator must be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Date and time entries must be entered as ‘DD/MM/YY hh:mm:ss’. The ‘space’ between the date and time must be entered, as must the ‘colon’ separator on the time portion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Criteria may be entered from a lookup screen. This is available on fields with a ‘!’ button next to them. Simply press the lookup button to bring up a screen of all data. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any number of criteria may be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once entered, press the ‘Find’ button to find data using the criteria entered. The screen will flip to the grid view, to show you all the data selected in a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the grid view, you can change the width of each of the data columns. The screen will not remember your setting when next you use the screen. You can sort the data by clicking on the column header. You can sort the data in reverse order by shift- or control-clicking on the item in the header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can flip back to the detail view, by clicking on the appropriate tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection criteria can be added by pressing the ‘New Criteria’ button. This will blank the screen, and allow you to enter criteria for the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the criteria entered, use the ‘Amend Criteria’ button. This will blank the screen, and display the current selection criteria. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to remove all criteria during entry or amendment, press the ‘Clear Criteria’ button. This will remove all previously entered criteria, and start from a blank screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To re-find data based on the current selection criteria, press the ‘Refresh’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lookup Screens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ToolBars&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Truck Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to view the Truck Types standing data, sent from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the data, simply click on the title of the column you want sorted. The data will automatically sort in this order. To sort the data in reverse order, hold down the Shift key when you click on the column title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reason Code Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to view the Reason Codes standing data, sent from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the data, simply click on the title of the column you want sorted. The data will automatically sort in this order. To sort the data in reverse order, hold down the Shift key when you click on the column title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pallet Type Enquiry ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to view the Pallet Types standing data, sent from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the data, simply click on the title of the column you want sorted. The data will automatically sort in this order. To sort the data in reverse order, hold down the Shift key when you click on the column title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Update Truck Moves Seq ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to recalculate the sequences of the truck move tasks in the WCS, with relation to certain flags against the aisle being changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related Topics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aisles Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lookup Screens ===&lt;br /&gt;
All the lookup screens in the WCS have the same functionality. Generally, lookup screens are used to display quantities of data where a combo box may not show all the support data that is required. A lookup will provide this extra information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you enter the lookup screen, the data is displayed from top to bottom, alphabetically. If required, you can scroll the data using the scrollbar on the side. When you have chosen your line, you can return to the calling screen by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double clicking on the line&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing Return on the line&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the line and pressing OK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To return to the calling screen without choosing data, simply press the cancel button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find specific data, you can press the first letter of the data you want. This will take you to the first occurrence of the data starting with that letter. Subsequent presses of the same key will move you on to the next occurrence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quickly typing the first few letters of the data you are looking for will refine the search, until you have found your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Windows Menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is a standard windows menu. It includes the options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Cascade&lt;br /&gt;
* Tile Horizontal&lt;br /&gt;
* Tile Vertical&lt;br /&gt;
* Arrange Icons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The menu also includes a list of all opened windows, so the user can switch between them easily when necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Help ==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: F1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu allows you to access the help files associated with the WCS Maintenance program and windows. It can also be accessed from the toolbar using the appropriate button. The help given is context-sensitive, so you should be directed straight to help about your current screen. If direct help is not available from this screen, you will be taken to a topic list, where you can choose from all the help available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also see the version of the software you are running by clicking the About menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Miscellaneous ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Refresh Screen ===&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Refresh' button can be used to re-find the data from the database, using your original selection criteria. This is useful if any changes have taken place on the data since you found it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ToolBars ===&lt;br /&gt;
Toolbars can be modified using the standard Windows method of double clicking on a blank portion of the toolbar. This will bring up the toolbar modification window&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modifications can be made to several areas by adding from the left-hand window to the right-hand window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the position of the items in the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add as many of the separator items as you like - there will always be more of them in the left-hand window!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Database Utilities ===&lt;br /&gt;
This program allows you to enquire and change any data on the system database. THIS OPTION IS ENABLE FOR SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ONLY, AND SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR ANY OTHER REASON. The DBUTILS program is separate and as such can be removed from the local functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usage of the program: Trained users only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rules Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
This program uses a standard mechanism for maintaining rules in the system. This mechanism is described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rules required are displayed in an explorer window, showing the rule groups on the left-hand pane, and the rules belonging to that group in the right-hand pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find rules, click on the appropriate section in the left-hand pane. The rules will display on the right-hand pane. Should there be too many rules to display on one screen, the screen will provide a scroll-bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rules can be broken down into several types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fixed Values - these will be displayed in a drop-down list, for you to select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text values - plain text for you to type the value in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numeric values - plain numeric values for you to type in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browse buttons - where the WCS requires a directory listing or file selection, a browse button is provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Database lookups - there the WCS requires a data value, a drop-down list is provided with the values allowed. There will also be a blank value on the list for you to select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As each value is modified and you move to the next, the data will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Screen which contain Rules explorers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Warehouse Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Groups Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Owners Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
System Settings&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=Set-up_Guide&amp;diff=4</id>
		<title>Set-up Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=Set-up_Guide&amp;diff=4"/>
		<updated>2009-05-13T11:55:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New page: = INTRODUCTION = This document is intended to show the further set-up possibilities on the WCS. This guide should be used by super-users and testing teams during initial set-up. An alphabe...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= INTRODUCTION =&lt;br /&gt;
This document is intended to show the further set-up possibilities on the WCS. This guide should be used by super-users and testing teams during initial set-up. An alphabetical list of all rules and their values is also included in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This document assumes that the installation has taken place (as described in the document WCS Installation Guide) and that set-up has occurred and a connection established in the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' A familiarity is required of the use of the WMS with respect to the WCS (as described in the document RDT Training Guide WMS), as well as a reasonable knowledge of the WCS Maintenance functions (as described in the document WCS Maintenance User Guide). See References for more details of the referred documents, in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Data sent from WMS =&lt;br /&gt;
There are several tables on the WCS that are used to control basic functions. As this data is available on the WMS as well, drip-feed interfaces have been enabled to send this data from the WMS to the WCS. The following section describes which of these tables are set up like this, and for what purpose the information in used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reason Codes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Reason codes are sent from the WMS to the WCS from a maintenance screen in the WMS. Instructions on how to do this and what is sent are in the WMS Training guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reason codes are used in a variety of places in the RDT application, for example when picks are cancelled or short-picked, or damaged or additional pallets are received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS is simply the Reason code itself, along with which company and warehouse the codes are associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS can be seen by running the Reason Codes Enquiry from the Standing Data menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pallet Types ==&lt;br /&gt;
Pallet types are sent from the WMS to the WCS from a maintenance screen in the WMS. Instructions on how to do this and what is sent are in the WMS Training guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pallet Types are used mainly when entering the details of pallets, for example in goods receipt. Normally, however, the pallet type can be left blank, as the WMS will default the pallet type to that normally received for the stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS is simply the pallet type itself, along with which company and warehouse the types are associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS can be seen by running the Pallet Types Enquiry from the Standing Data menu. If a more permanent copy is required, a report can be run from the Reports menu (Pallet Types List)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Truck Types ==&lt;br /&gt;
Truck Types are sent from the WMS to the WCS from a maintenance screen in the WMS. Instructions on how to do this and what is sent are in the WMS Training guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Truck Types are used when logging on to the WCS. The type used defines in which areas the driver is allowed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS is simply the truck type itself, along with which company the trucks are associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS can be seen by running the Truck Type Enquiry from the Standing Data menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location Types/Truck Types ==&lt;br /&gt;
Location types/Truck types are sent from the WMS to the WCS from a maintenance screen in the WMS. Instructions on how to do this and what is sent are in the WMS Training guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location types (and their associated truck types) are used in nearly every enquiry in the WCS. Every task, to move a pallet from one point to another, defines which location type the associated location is. The data received from the WMS defines which truck types are allowed access to that particular location. This, coupled with the truck type the RDT user enters at log-on, defines where exactly that user is allowed to operate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS is the location type, with all associated truck types, along with which company and warehouse the types are associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS can be checked by running the Location Truck Type Checker from the Standing Data menu. This is used by entering the location types you want to check in the appropriate combo boxes in the form, the clicking the ‘Check’ button. The form will show you all the trucks associated with each location types, and which trucks have access to both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a permanent copy of the data is required, a report can be run from the Reports menu (Location Type/Truck Types List).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receipt Types ==&lt;br /&gt;
Receipt Types are sent from the WMS to the WCS from a maintenance screen in the WMS. Instructions on how to do this and what is sent are in the WMS Training guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Receipt types are used only in the goods receipt RDT module, and only if they have been enabled. This allows RDT users to define the receipt type that will be passed back and stored on the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS is simply the receipt type itself, along with which company and warehouse the codes are associated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS can be seen by running the Receipt Types Enquiry from the Standing Data menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Employees ==&lt;br /&gt;
Employees (Users) are sent from the WMS to the WCS from a maintenance screen in the WMS. Instructions on how to do this and what is sent are in the WMS Training guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employees are used mainly at log-on on the RDT. They can also be used to authorise events on the RDT, if required. The entered employees are stamped as completing their tasks, and this information is stored on the WMS for analysis later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS consists of elements passed from the WMS and also elements that the WCS requires itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Employees will be set up when received as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Company Code – from WMS&lt;br /&gt;
* Warehouse Id – from WMS&lt;br /&gt;
* Employee Code – from WMS&lt;br /&gt;
* Employee Name – from WMS&lt;br /&gt;
* Password - None&lt;br /&gt;
* Access Type – RDT&lt;br /&gt;
* Group - None&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, one row in this table is created during the initialisation procedure of the database (the user initial admin user ADM is created). This can be seen in the WCS Installation Guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS can be seen by running the Users Maintenance screen from the Standing Data menu. If a more permanent copy is required, a report can be run from the Reports menu (Employees List)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See section  for details of how to further configure the Employees table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aisles ==&lt;br /&gt;
Aisle codes are sent from the WMS to the WCS from a validation process in the WMS. This depends on some very specific system set-up in both the WMS and WCS. However, if this happens, the aisle data is set up as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Aisle Code – from the WMS tables.&lt;br /&gt;
* Availability – Y, N or P&lt;br /&gt;
* Company code and Warehouse ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aisle codes are used for two main reasons in the WCS:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To give the closest next task to an operative&lt;br /&gt;
* To allow or disallow putaway in certain aisles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data sent automatically above accounts for the operation of the second piece of functionality. Other items on the WCS Aisles table control the first piece.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from these parameters, there is also the option to send over extra aisle information if needed from the Aisles Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This extra information is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Aisle Sequence Code&lt;br /&gt;
* Linked Aisle Code, Locs In Aisle and High End Access&lt;br /&gt;
* PD Out Location, Type, Check Digits and Max Pallets&lt;br /&gt;
* PD In Location, Type, Check Digits and Max Pallets&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data stored on the WCS can be seen by running the Aisles Maintenance screen from the Standing Data menu. If a more permanent copy is required, a report can be run from the Reports menu (Aisles/P&amp;amp;D List). This report, however, links more closely into the further configuration of aisles utilising P&amp;amp;D locations (see sections  and )&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See section  for details of how to further configure the Aisles table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stock Parameters and Barcodes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Stock configuration and barcode information is sent from the WMS to the WCS from the stock maintenance screen in the WMS and from EDI. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When stock codes are added or changed and updated, the messages are sent to the WCS. These are not visible within the WCS Maintenance program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data sent includes validation items and barcode information, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Item&lt;br /&gt;
! Type&lt;br /&gt;
! Length&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Owner Code&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 3&lt;br /&gt;
| Owner Code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 20&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Description&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 40&lt;br /&gt;
| Description, for display&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Standard Pallet Qty&lt;br /&gt;
| Long Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 4&lt;br /&gt;
| For validation in Goods Receipt and Stock Take&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Layer Qty &lt;br /&gt;
| Long Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 4&lt;br /&gt;
| For layer quantity entry in Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Shelf Life &lt;br /&gt;
| Long Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 4&lt;br /&gt;
| For validation of sell-by dates in Goods Receipt and Stock Take&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Manu Date Required&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the stock requires Manufacture dates to be entered. Used in Goods Receipt and Stock Take.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sell By Date Required&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the stock requires Sell-by dates to be entered. Used in Goods Receipt and Stock Take.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Cust Batch Required&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the stock requires Customer Batches to be entered. Used in Goods Receipt and Stock Take.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Seals Required&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the stock requires a seal to be entered at Goods Receipt. (Bespoke. Oracle Only.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Hazardous&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the stock is hazardous. Used in Shipment Pallet functionality. (Bespoke. Oracle Only.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Chill &lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 1&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the stock is chill. Used in Shipment Pallet functionality. (Bespoke. Oracle Only.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Factor_1_2&lt;br /&gt;
| Long Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 4&lt;br /&gt;
| The factor used by WMS to determine the number of units in a case, usually. Used for Multi UOM functionality. (C-ISAM only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Factor_2_3&lt;br /&gt;
| Long Integer&lt;br /&gt;
| 4&lt;br /&gt;
| The factor used by WMS to determine the number of cases on a pallet, usually. Used for Multi UOM functionality. (C-ISAM only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Description 2&lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 30&lt;br /&gt;
| Second description line, for display&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pack Size &lt;br /&gt;
| Text&lt;br /&gt;
| 10&lt;br /&gt;
| Pack Size, for display&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The barcode information is used to determine the elements within a barcode that can be scanned for identification of the stock code. This is usually EAN codes and UCC-EAN codes. When set up in the WMS, this information is sent through to the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= WCS Internal Data =&lt;br /&gt;
Further information is required by the WCS to run. This data is not available from the WMS and must be set up on the WCS itself. This section shows the data that needs to be entered directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all these cases, further details on how to use this screen can be found in the WCSM Users Guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Groups ==&lt;br /&gt;
This table is used to configure the options individual users can have when accessing RDT or Maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One row in this table is created during the initialisation procedure of the database (the group ADM is created when the initial admin user is created). This can be seen in the WCS Installation Guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data can be seen and modified from the Groups Maintenance screen, found on the Standing Data menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users are partially maintained by the WMS, sending data records when an employee is added or deleted. You can add system settings to a user, using the Group ID reference field. This links to records you can maintain in this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The group contains switches to show which users are allowed to use which functions. As such, the screen allows you to enter a unique group id, and a description of the group. You are then given a list of all available functions on the WCS and RDTs. Simply click which functions you require from one list to the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT items that can be set up (and their descriptions) are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Rule&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Blind (Stock level) and Check (Pallet level) Goods Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Full-Pallet Putaway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Pallet Move&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Full-Pallet Movements generated from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Ad Hoc Move&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow instigation of a housekeeping Move from the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Full-pallet Picks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Part Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Case and Unit picks from the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Stock Take&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Full (Blind) and Partial (Check) Stock Check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Bulk PI&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Perpetual Inventory (ad hoc stock check).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Shipment Pallet Building&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Building. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Shipment Pallet Despatch&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Despatch. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Shipment Pallet Moves&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Moves. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Pallet Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to enquire on the contents of a pallet from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Location Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to enquire on the contents of a location from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Move Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT to see where a pallet is going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Move Select&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow cherry-picking of an individual Move task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Select Replenishment&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Select Replenishment. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Replenishment&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow completion (and/or generation) of a Replenishment. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Stock Move&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Stock Moves (request replenishment of pick face). Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Ad Hoc Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Ad Hoc Putaway for shelving locations. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Receipt Serial No Scanning&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow entering serial numbers for received items. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Despatch Serial No Scanning&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow entering serial numbers for picked items. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Loading&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Loading ojnto a vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Reject Spur&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Reject Spur Processing. Bespoke to automated conveyor and P&amp;amp;D systems. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Cherry Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Choose an order to pick from&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Combined Split&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Ad hoc movements of small quantities of stock to other locations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Stock Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Enquire on Stock code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Mail&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow receipt of messages from Maintenance administrators. (Generally, this should always be enabled).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Reposition&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow a task to be repositioned to a different destination location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Cancellation&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Moves and Picks to be cancelled, causing the reversion of data on the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Damages&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Damage quantity entry during Goods Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Receive Additional Pallets&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow receipt of extra pallets in Check Goods Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Pick Location Error&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow a Pick to be cancelled at the initial location stage (for example, if the pick face is unavailable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Continuous Part Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Is this module enabled by default for RDT users?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT DC Aisles&lt;br /&gt;
| when using Dual Cycling (Interleaving) in Narrow Aisles, allow RDT user to select range of aisles to operate in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Marshall&lt;br /&gt;
| Not Yet Implemented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| User Select Pick Location&lt;br /&gt;
| Is the user allowed to specify the location from which picking to start?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Deconsolidation&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow deconsolidation of consolidated orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Despatch&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow despatch of deconsolidated orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Weighing&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to Weight Shipment Packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The Admin items that can be set up (and their descriptions) are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Rule&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Change Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user to change the default warehouse they can see&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Comms&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to the RDT Comms menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Comms Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user Enquiry-only access to the top 2 items on the RDT Comms menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Logs&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Logs Enquiry screens in the System Tools menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Report&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Reports menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Settings System&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the System Settings option on the System Tools menu. NOTE: This option should only be enabled for super-users, and even then should only be enabled sparingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Standing Data&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to all items on the Standing Data menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be. NOTE: This option will allow users to see other users’ passwords, and should therefore be limited only to those users who require it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Standing Data Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Enquiry screens only on the Standing Data menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Task Edit&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to all the screens on the Tasks menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Task Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to all the screens on the Tasks menu, but for enquiry purposes only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Utilities Clear Out&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Clear-Out options on the System Tools menu. NOTE: This should only be available for super-users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Utilities DB Utils&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Database Utilities options on the System Tools menu (this is currently being phased out).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Utilities Repair and Compact&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Compact Database option on the System Tools menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
== System Parameters ==&lt;br /&gt;
The values in this table are created during the initialisation procedure of the database. This can be seen in the WCS Installation Guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configuration items are grouped into 4 sections. Each is described in detail in the following sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rules ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCS Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to modify the communication settings of the WCS, plus settings which directly affect how the system communicates. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note 1:''' Changing these settings may affect the running of the WCS server. If you are not sure of the consequences of your actions, telephone the support team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note 2:''' These settings will be enabled during system configuration and in normal circumstances should never be changed. Changes to WCS configuration settings will not take place until after the next stop and start of the WCS Server process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings common to both connection systems (C-ISAM and Oracle) that may be modified are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Company Code&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default company code that the RDT will log on to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete Records&lt;br /&gt;
| When this option is checked, completed tasks are deleted from the WCS database. All logging is still in place. When un-checked, the completed tasks are marked for deletion by the cleardown process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Hold Priority&lt;br /&gt;
| This allows the lowest priority in the WCS to be used as a Held status. When this option is checked, and tasks on priority 9 will not be allocated to RDTs to complete. To release the tasks, re-prioritise the task to a higher level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Wait Time&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the amount of time that the RDT will wait before re-trying communications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Window Caption&lt;br /&gt;
| This field changes the displayed name of the WCS Server process, when running. This is useful when running multiple systems on one site or one server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT_WCS LocalPort&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the port that the WCS listens to for communications from RDTs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Log Path&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Logging database – When this option is checked, you will be prompted to enter a location for the logging database. THIS OPTION MUST NOT BE CHANGED IF THE WCS SERVER IS RUNNING. When this is done, the logging files in the normal database are no longer used – a new database will be created in the defined area and the WCS server will begin all logging to this database instead. All options in the WCS that use these logging files will now use the new database instead. The logging files are: Error log; Incoming log; Outgoing log; RDT Activities and; Exceptions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If the system is connecting using socket connections, the following details can be modified:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WMS HostName&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the IP address or host/DNS name of the WMS machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WMS_WCS LocalPort&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the port that the WCS listens to for communications from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS_WMS RemotePort&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the port that the WMS listens to for communications from the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WMS to WCS Try Limit&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the amount of times the WCS will try to send a message to the WMS, if the message has been refused, before logging the error and trying the next.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Use Dummy Checksum&lt;br /&gt;
| Used to terminate the interface messages with a dummy checksum value (??)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If the system being linked to is using Oracle Advanced Queues, the following options will be available:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Database&lt;br /&gt;
| The database the WCS connects to for the messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora User&lt;br /&gt;
| The username for the connection to the Oracle database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Password&lt;br /&gt;
| The password of the user for the connection to the Oracle database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Incoming Queue Name&lt;br /&gt;
| The Oracle queue on which Incoming messages are stored. Outgoing messages are stored by messages type on the queues defined in the table ORA Type Queues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Queue Listener Agent&lt;br /&gt;
| The Oracle agent defines which messages to take from the Oracle database queues, and what Agent to write them as. Each instance of the WCS has a unique Agent name, usually per warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
There are also settings for links to an FTP Server. This is a bespoke modification, for the connection to a batch delivery system. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File FTP Server&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The server where flat files are sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File FTP User&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The user for logging into the FTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File FTP Password&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The password for logging into the FTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File FTP Location&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The location where files are to be found on the FTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File Location&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The location where files are to be located on the FTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
==== Admin Defaults ====&lt;br /&gt;
If a user hasn’t been assigned a Group, they have access to Admin functions in the way set up here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Admin items that can be set up (and their descriptions) are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Rule&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Change Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user to change the default warehouse they can see&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Comms&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to the RDT Comms menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Comms Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user Enquiry-only access to the top 2 items on the RDT Comms menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Logs&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Logs Enquiry screens in the System Tools menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Report&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Reports menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Settings System&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the System Settings option on the System Tools menu. NOTE: This option should only be enabled for super-users, and even then should only be enabled sparingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Standing Data&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to all items on the Standing Data menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be. NOTE: This option will allow users to see other users’ passwords, and should therefore be limited only to those users who require it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Standing Data Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Enquiry screens only on the Standing Data menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Task Edit&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to all the screens on the Tasks menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Task Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to all the screens on the Tasks menu, but for enquiry purposes only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Utilities Clear Out&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Clear-Out options on the System Tools menu. NOTE: This should only be available for super-users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Utilities DB Utils&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Database Utilities options on the System Tools menu (this is currently being phased out).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Admin Utilities Repair and Compact&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Compact Database option on the System Tools menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Message Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab allows the user to maintain remote queue names for connection to the Oracle WMS. These are not required if the user is running the WCS connected to the C-ISAM WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab controls settings that affect the operation of the WCS Maintenance program directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Criteria Templates Folder &lt;br /&gt;
| This is the folder where criteria files for the selection of data in certain screens are held. More details on these reprioritisation screens can be found in the WCSM User Guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Report Files Folder &lt;br /&gt;
| This is the folder where the reports run from the Maintenance program are held. These can be local or remote.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Reports Folder &lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default folder where the output from reports (if requested) is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Recent Files &lt;br /&gt;
| This is a simple list of the databases opened recently. A button (Clear List) can be clicked to remove all these files from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Show File List at Startup &lt;br /&gt;
| This controls whether the file list is shown on start-up, or a simple file browser. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clear Down ===&lt;br /&gt;
These parameters control how data is cleared from the WCS database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Location of Log Files &lt;br /&gt;
| This specifies where the log archive is kept. The Log archive is the area where cleared data is stored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clear Database &lt;br /&gt;
| If checked, any data older than the period entered is removed from the current database and placed in a new archive database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clear Log Archive &lt;br /&gt;
| If checked, and log archives stored are deleted if they are older than the period specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clear Exceptions &lt;br /&gt;
| If checked, any exceptions older than the period specified is removed from the current database and placed in a new archive database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clear Activities &lt;br /&gt;
| If checked, any Activities records older than the period specified is removed from the current database and placed in a new archive database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clear Deleted Records &lt;br /&gt;
| If checked, any records marked for deletion older than the period specified are removed from the current database and placed in a new archive database. See section  for details of how data can be marked for deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clear Incoming Log / Outgoing Log /Clear Error Log &lt;br /&gt;
| If checked, any interface log records older than the period specified are removed from the current database and placed in a new archive database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
These settings should be enabled on the WCS Server PC only, as this is the place where any scheduled cleardown procedure would be run from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Warehouses ==&lt;br /&gt;
The values in this table are created during the initialisation procedure of the database. This can be seen in the WCS Installation Guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' The values in this section govern how the WCS Server and RDT processes work. Generally, these items have been set up for you in the way that is most conducive to the way you operate in the warehouse. These values should not be changed unless you know how these will change the way the system operates. Changing the values may not have an immediate effect on the operation of the WCS. The safest way to change parameters is to log out all RDTs, the stop the WCS Server before making the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barcode configuration for the warehouse is available from a button on the form. Configuration items are grouped into seven sections. Each of the above is described in detail in the following sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab controls the basic operation of the warehouse selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Rule_Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Rule_Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Action Password&lt;br /&gt;
| The password required when RDT functions are password-protected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Aisle Length&lt;br /&gt;
| The length of the Aisle portion of the Location code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bay Length&lt;br /&gt;
| The length of the Bay portion of the Location code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Level Length&lt;br /&gt;
| The length of the Level portion of the Location code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Task Identifier&lt;br /&gt;
| How the RDT identifies pallets in the warehouse. Normally, this would be set to ‘By System Pallet’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Check Digits?&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether and how check digits are used on the locations in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Move Efficient&lt;br /&gt;
| How tasks are assigned to RDT users. This defaults to ‘By Priority’ and may only be altered if no stock or pallet ID’s are used in the pick face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Block Stack&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether pallet exchanges operate in the warehouse. Should only be enabled if the warehouse contains Block Stack, Drive-in or Multi-deep locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Exchange Replen&lt;br /&gt;
| If the Warehouse is Block Stack, allow Replens to be exchanged as well. NOTE: This should only be enabled if no stock or pallet ID’s are used in the pick face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Task Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS checks for outstanding tasks to give to the user before asking WMS whether the pallet is available for exchange&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Seamless Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is set, the RDT will check whether an exchange can be done immediately, without requiring the user to press the Error function key first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mixed Stock&lt;br /&gt;
| whether pallets are allowed to have mixed stock on them in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Generate Replenishment&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether the WCS generates the replenishment from Select Replen. For Calidus 3pl, this should always be enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Pop Up Description&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the RDT automatically pops up the stock description in the main RDT modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Multi UOM processing&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether the WCS will prompt for 2 UOMs on the RDT when entering quantity. If this is not set, the RDT will just prompt for cases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pallet Enquiry Print Labels&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls if pallet label can be printed from a pallet enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Pallet Enquiry Label Format&lt;br /&gt;
| Format of pallet enquiry label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== RDT Modules ===&lt;br /&gt;
For all users that haven’t been assigned to a Group, this section configures the options these users can have when accessing RDT or Maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT modules that can be set up (and their descriptions) are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Rule&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Blind (Stock level) and Check (Pallet level) Goods Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Full-Pallet Putaway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Pallet Move&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Full-Pallet Movements generated from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Ad Hoc Move&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow instigation of a housekeeping Move from the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Full-pallet Picks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Part Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Case and Unit picks from the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Stock Take&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Full (Blind) and Partial (Check) Stock Check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Bulk PI&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Perpetual Inventory (ad hoc stock check).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Shipment Pallet Building&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Building. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Shipment Pallet Despatch&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Despatch. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Shipment Pallet Moves&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Moves. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Pallet Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to enquire on the contents of a pallet from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Location Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to enquire on the contents of a location from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Move Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT to see where a pallet is going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Move Select&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow cherry-picking of an individual Move task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Select Replenishment&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Select Replenishment. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Replenishment&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow completion (and/or generation) of a Replenishment. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Stock Move&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Stock Moves (request replenishment of pick face). Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Ad Hoc Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Ad Hoc Putaway for shelving locations. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Receipt Serial No Scanning&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow entering serial numbers for received items. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Despatch Serial No Scanning&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow entering serial numbers for picked items. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Loading&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Loading ojnto a vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Reject Spur&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Reject Spur Processing. Bespoke to automated conveyor and P&amp;amp;D systems. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Cherry Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Choose an order to pick from&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Combined Split&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Ad hoc movements of small quantities of stock to other locations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Stock Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Enquire on Stock code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Mail&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow receipt of messages from Maintenance administrators. (Generally, this should always be enabled).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Marshall&lt;br /&gt;
| Not Yet Implemented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Deconsolidation&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow deconsolidation of consolidated orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Despatch&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow despatch of deconsolidated orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Weighing&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to Weight Shipment Packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Receipt  ===&lt;br /&gt;
The parameters on this tab control how receipt works on the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Type&lt;br /&gt;
| How the RDT actions the Receipt process – either Blind (stock-level advice) or Check (Pallet-level advice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Selection Type&lt;br /&gt;
| How to find the receipt on the RDT - via Advice Note or GRN no.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Damages&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Damage quantity entry during Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter WMS Rotation&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to enter Rotation during Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Pallet Type&lt;br /&gt;
| during Goods Receipt, whether the RDT user is prompted for a valid Pallet Type at the start of the receipt. This will then be the default for all pallets subsequently received during that session for that user. Without this item being enabled, pressing ‘RETURN’ in the pallet type field against a received pallet will tell WMS to default to its Default Pallet Type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Receipt Type&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to enter the receipt type in RDT Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Echo Putaway Location&lt;br /&gt;
| If enabled, this parameter makes the RDT Receiving process display the suggested putaway location after successfully receiving a pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Print Labels&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls where/if pallet labels are printed during the receipt process&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Receipt Label Format&lt;br /&gt;
| Format of the receipt label printed, if printed from the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Additional Pallets&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow additional pallets to be received during the RDT receipt process&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Single Scan Entry for Additional Pallets&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow users to scan single barcode for entry of some required elements for adding additional pallets&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Non-advised Stock Codes&lt;br /&gt;
| Is the user allowed to receive stock codes that have not been preadvised for that receipt?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Pallet Count Check&lt;br /&gt;
| If the number of pallets on a received stock item exceeds that preadvised, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Total Qty Stock Check&lt;br /&gt;
| If the quantity of a stock item exceeds the total preadvised, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Pallet Qty Check (Pallet)&lt;br /&gt;
| If the pallet quantity for a stock item is different to the pallet quantity preadvised, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take. Only for preadvices at a pallet level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Standard Qty Check (Stock)&lt;br /&gt;
| If the pallet quantity for a stock item is different to the standard pallet quantity, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take. Only for preadvices at stock level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Eurodate&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Enter Eurodate rather than Manufacture Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Layers&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Layers and Bits at Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Pack Size Entry&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is enabled, pack size will be prompted for when entering pallet details for impression stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Impressions Check&lt;br /&gt;
| If the impressions quantity for a stock item is different to the impressions quantity preadvised, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take. Only for preadvices at pallet level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Purchase Order Entry&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Purchase Order entry during RF goods receipt, if the receipt contains lines from multiple Purchase Orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Close GRN&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow RDT users to close GRNs at the end of the receipt process, by asking them to confirm that the GRN is now complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Putaway ===&lt;br /&gt;
The parameters on this tab control how putaway works on the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Multi-Pallet Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow several pallets to be picked up during putaway&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Extended Reposition Validation&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the WCS performs extended checks when a reposition location is chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Request Putaway Details at Scan&lt;br /&gt;
| Require the WMS to decide on a putaway location at the time of putaway scan, rather than at receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Reposition&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow reposition on the RDTs? This option can be over-ridden by the Group setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Cancellation&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow cancellation on the RDTs? This option can be over-ridden by the Group setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Picking/Post-Picking Activities ===&lt;br /&gt;
These parameters control how the RDT acts during the picking modules. Also, some of these flags control how the WCS receives picking tasks, and how it assigns them to RDT users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick By&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls what the RDT prompts for as confirmation that the correct item has been found for picking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Continuous Part Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| When part picking, asks the user whether they want to continue part picking (i.e. build a despatch pallet from several pick lines).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Into Containers&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether RDT Part Picking prompts for Picking Container IDs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Lost Label&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether a user is allowed to identify a pallet during picking from its stock information (stock code, batch, etc) rather than entering the pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Location Error&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT picker to cancel an pick at the point of confirming the location code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Residual Stock Balance Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether the RDT user is prompted to enter the amount of remaining stock in the pick face after a part pick. The WCS requests the WMS to find the current quantity of stock in the pick face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Use WMS Rotation &lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is set, wherever Customer Batch is displayed or entered during Picking or Deconsolidation, the RDT will display or request the entry of WMS Rotation instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picker Replens&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow pickers to perform their own replens at the point of picking the part picks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Dependencies&lt;br /&gt;
| Ensure part picks are not released for picking until any outstanding replenishment has been completed first&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Replen Dependencies&lt;br /&gt;
| This rule controls whether the number of replenishment moves into a pick face are limited. Also, that the replen associated with the highest priority pick is released first, whilst all others are held.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick In Sequence&lt;br /&gt;
| If picks have been placed on a Load, what sequence should orders be released for picking?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Page Allocation&lt;br /&gt;
| This controls how the WCS allocates picks to pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Concurrent Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow loads to be picked concurrently with other loads, when picking by aisle. This stops new loads being started by pickers until the current load has been fully allocated to pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Lock Pick Header&lt;br /&gt;
| Lock the picking header record for full pallet picking/load building&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Consolidation Group&lt;br /&gt;
| For Consolidated picking: How to create groups of picks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Force Sky Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| Are part pick tasks from bulk treated as sky picks?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Print Despatch Labels&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the RDT attempts to print despatch labels for picked stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Despatch Label Format&lt;br /&gt;
| Format of the despatch label&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Label Prompt&lt;br /&gt;
| Where should pick labels be prompted for?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| User Select Pick Location&lt;br /&gt;
| Is the user allowed to specify the location from which picking to start?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Deconsolidation Method&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether Deconsolidation tasks are processed by the WCS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ad Hoc Deconsolidation&lt;br /&gt;
| Are deconsolidation tasks sequenced manually or by the system?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Loading Method&lt;br /&gt;
| Loading Method in use for the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Loading Selection Type&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether the RDT initially asks the user to load stock by Route/Load or Order Number. This can be changed by the user when loading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PC Generation Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
| Algorithm to generate Picking Containers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PC Prefix&lt;br /&gt;
| Prefix for automatically-generated Picking Container&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Weigh Shipment Package&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the entry and validation of the Catch Weight during the Shipment Pallet Building process&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ship Pack Weight Check&lt;br /&gt;
| If a weight entered during the Shipment Package Weight function is outside the tolerance value, what action should the RDT take?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Weight Tolerance&lt;br /&gt;
| If weights are being checked by the Shipment Package functions, what tolerance is allowed (plus or minus, in kilograms)?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Display Order Summary&lt;br /&gt;
| Defines when the order summary screen is displayed on the RDT during part picking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Load before Pick Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether the WCS will allow loading to be done before the entire order has been Pick Confirmed in the WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dual Cycling ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section controls how the RDT is allocated DC tasks, and how the RDT responds to the user requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Dual Cycling&lt;br /&gt;
| If this is enabled, the RDT logon procedure allows users to choose whether they work in Bulk (NA areas) or not. Depending on this choice, the RDT displays Dual Cycling options for the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NADC Crossover Method&lt;br /&gt;
| The method by which the RDT NA drivers are moved to another aisle in their range during Dual Cycling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NADC Threshold Priority&lt;br /&gt;
| If using the Threshold crossover method, this parameter details the level at which tasks are considered urgent, to be actioned immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Send Aisle Status to WMS&lt;br /&gt;
| For NA areas: Inform the WMS that the aisle has a truck in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NADC Aisle Lock&lt;br /&gt;
| The point at which an aisle is locked to prevent other RDTs using the aisle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT DC Aisle Selection&lt;br /&gt;
| If using Dual Cycling, this parameter controls whether the user is allowed to select a range of Aisles in which to work, or simply accept the default aisle range entered against the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NADC Skip Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow full NADC users to skip putaways in aisles, and do the next pick immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Exclude Blocked Moves from Priority Calc&lt;br /&gt;
| Whilst calculating the priority of moves within an aisle, exclude moves which cannot currently be completed, due to blocked P&amp;amp;D locations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Exclude Source to Dest moves from WA DC&lt;br /&gt;
| Ensures WA DC (interleaving) focuses more on emptying P&amp;amp;D locations rather than completing housekeeping moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Default Locations ===&lt;br /&gt;
This set of options is generally used with a conveyor system (bespoke). However, the first parameter (Default Receiving Location) also controls whether the RDT Receipt module prompts for a receiving location for a pallet. This can then be reflected on subsequent putaways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bespoke ===&lt;br /&gt;
This set of options controls what bespoke development can be enabled or disabled. '''Note:''' functionality in this section is generally very specific to a particular operation and should only be enabled with a system that is configured exactly as that operation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke Site Rule&lt;br /&gt;
| Site identity defining which bespoke rules are to apply&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke Kraft Batch&lt;br /&gt;
| Remove non-alphabetic characters from the start of the Batch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick By Carton&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick a quantity of stock by scanning individual cartons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Encoded Sell By Dates?&lt;br /&gt;
| Use encoded sell by dates?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Overpicking&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to enter a picked quantity which is greater that that required by the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Batch Delivery Process&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable creation of flat files for the Batch Carton Delivery process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke BHS No Mixed Stock&lt;br /&gt;
| Disables some of the generic Mixed Stock functionality in the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picks by Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
| Allocates pick tasks to the RDT users by quantity, largest first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Pick Station&lt;br /&gt;
| Identify the picking station at the start of part picking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Pack Type&lt;br /&gt;
| Prompt for the pack type when picking. This is for the carton sizes when pack records are created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke No Batch Prompt&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is enabled, no customer’s batch will be prompted when entering pallet details, even if the WMS has requested that one is entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picker Replen by Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow pickers, when doing their own replenishments, to replenish areas by stock moves, not pallet moves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Nokia Barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
| This rule controls whether the RDT will expect to scan Nokia barcode labels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Take Enter GRN&lt;br /&gt;
| When adding pallets during Stock Take or Perpetual Inventory, request the user to enter a GRN number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke Nokia Stock Take Imps&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is enabled, only the impression quantity will be prompted for when checking impression stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== Barcode Fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen, the fields the RDT will decode from UCC/EAN-128 barcodes can be defined. These items are used in Goods Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Owners ==&lt;br /&gt;
The values in this table are created when the user logs on to the RDT for the first time. The WCS will check for the existence of the WCS and create an owner record, indicating whether the owner requires customer pallet IDs to be entered. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS can also create rules at an owner level, which will supersede the rules at the Warehouse level. This can be done by checking the Restricted box. At this point, the WCS will create rules for the Owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' The values in this section govern how the WCS Server and RDT processes work. Generally, these items have been set up for you in the way that is most conducive to the way you operate in the warehouse. These values should not be changed unless you know how these will change the way the system operates. Changing the values may not have an immediate effect on the operation of the WCS. The safest way to change parameters is to log out all RDTs, the stop the WCS Server before making the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Barcode configuration for the warehouse is available from a button on the form. Configuration items are grouped into seven sections. In general, the rules at Owner level are the same as the rules at warehouse level. Each of the above is described in detail in the warehousing section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== P&amp;amp;Ds ==&lt;br /&gt;
P&amp;amp;D locations are staging areas or racks at the end of a narrow aisle to allow pallets to be dropped off mid-move, and then picked up by the next truck available to do that job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items that can be entered on this screen are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Code – The P&amp;amp;D Location Code.&lt;br /&gt;
* Location Type – This can be chosen from the drop-down list. This is only important if the client is using Reject Spur functionality in the warehouse, which is bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
* Check Digits – As above. Can be left blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* PnD Type – Affects the order in which NA trucks pick up pallets from P&amp;amp;Ds in NADC. Choose from 3 types:&lt;br /&gt;
** FIFO – First on to the P&amp;amp;D will be first suggested off the P&amp;amp;D&lt;br /&gt;
** LIFO – Last on to the P&amp;amp;D will be first suggested off the P&amp;amp;D&lt;br /&gt;
** Random – User scans pallet to take off P&amp;amp;D.&lt;br /&gt;
* Actual/Max Pallets – by setting the max pallets, you can limit the number of tasks that are allowed to each P&amp;amp;D.&lt;br /&gt;
* To recalculate the number of pallets actually at the P&amp;amp;D, click the Recalculate button. You will be asked to confirm your selection. There is no need to save the data once recalculated, as the program will do this automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Company code and Warehouse ID will default from the user’s default company and warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See section  for the use of P&amp;amp;D locations set up in the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== RDT ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is an optional set-up item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An RDT that make connections to the WCS create a record on this table. The WCS stores a unique key number and the RDT identifier, which is normally the IP address of the RDT. The data can be seen on the RDT ID Maintenance screen, found on the Standing Data menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table also contains a description, and this screen can be used to change this to a more user-friendly description of the RDT. Additionally, this allows you to keep a list of all RDTs and their IP addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When descriptions have been entered of the RDTs, this can be displayed against any activities or exceptions on the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Printers ==&lt;br /&gt;
Printers can be either networked windows printers, or direct TCP/IP connections. The screen allows entry of either type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A toolbar is included on the screen for ease of use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new records, press the new button on the toolbar. Once you have entered your new printer, press the save button or OK button. Your data will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find an existing record, press the find button on the toolbar. You will be taken to a lookup screen. Once you have selected your printer, the data will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate to other printers sequentially, use the scrollbar at the bottom of the screen. The status bar will show you which record you are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have found a printer, you may wish to change some parts of it. Simply click on your chosen field and edit it. Once you have made all your changes, press the save or OK button to save your data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a record, press the delete button on the toolbar, then confirm through the popup dialogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter a wireless printer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the New button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the printer a name.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter the IP address and port number of the printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then use the Printer Tests section to send through sample print files directly to the printer to ensure that the IP address and port number are set correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter a Windows printer:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the New button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Give the printer a name.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the Windows printer from the drop-down box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note: '''The printers must be set up directly from the RDT or WCS Servers the RDT Applications are running from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details of how to set up Windows printers for the WCS, see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to print a test print to the printers from this screen, if you have a test print document. This can be achieved by putting the name of the test print document into the ‘Data File’ section on the form, or using the Browse (…) button to find the test print. Then click the Test Print button – the printer should then print the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Modification of Sent Data =&lt;br /&gt;
In some instances, data that has been sent from the WMS doesn’t have enough detail for the WCS. In this instance, further information must be entered on the WCS for records that already exist. This section describes the data that may need modifying, and what can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For these screen, further details on how to use this screen can be found in the WCSM Users Guide, referenced in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Employees ==&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned in section , the Employee data comes partially pre-populated from the WMS. The rest of the settings can be manipulated in the Users Maintenance screen in the Standing Data menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data that can be amended in this screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Password – this can be set here. The password is encrypted in the WCS database and can only be read from this screen. Only certain users have access to this screen, controlled by the user’s assigned Group.&lt;br /&gt;
* Group ID – A group can be assigned, controlling the user’s access to RDT and Admin modules. See section  for details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Works Only in Aisle – These parameters effect the areas the user is given tasks, when operating System-directed tasks in the bulk areas. These will act as defaults for the user, or their defined range, depending on certain warehouse flags.&lt;br /&gt;
* Supervisor – Employees who are marked as Supervisor can use their username and password to unlock other RDT terminals. Locking occurs in some RDT modules as a result of some defined rule (for example, in Goods Receipt). See section  for details of some locking functions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Access Type – shows how the user is able to log on to the system – admin and/or RDT. This can be modified, and will take effect the next time the user logs on. &lt;br /&gt;
* Logged on shows how the user is currently logged on to the system. This can be reset using the reset button. N.B. this directly affects the users. USE WITH CARE.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Aisles ==&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned in section , the Aisle data comes partially pre-populated from the WMS. The rest of the settings can be manipulated in the Aisles Maintenance screen in the Standing Data menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data that can be amended in this screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sequence – This shows the order in which tasks from different aisles will be given to an RDT user, if moves are given in a location-efficient manner.&lt;br /&gt;
* Narrow Aisle – This controls whether this aisle can be selected in the NADC aisles selection. &lt;br /&gt;
* High End Access – This also controls the order in which tasks are given to users in DC. If set, tasks within an aisle are given in reverse order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Locs in Aisle – Future development.&lt;br /&gt;
* Linked Aisle Code – If this is populated, the WCS sees this aisle and the parent aisle code as one aisle, for NADC and aisle locking.&lt;br /&gt;
* Split Faces – If this is checked, the WCS splits tasks from odd and even bays separately.&lt;br /&gt;
* MHE-Fed – For Automated conveyor-fed aisles.&lt;br /&gt;
* PD Out/In – Controls whether the aisle utilises P&amp;amp;D locations for inbound and outbound tasks. The P&amp;amp;Ds can be chosen from a lookup.&lt;br /&gt;
* Display Info – This button displays some further information about the aisle:&lt;br /&gt;
** Availability – Set from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
** PD Weighting/Total Priority/IN/Out – Future development.&lt;br /&gt;
** Truck In – If a truck is currently in the aisle, the RDT will be shown here. &lt;br /&gt;
* Reset Status – Clears the aisle of any locks, allowing other RDT users to work in the aisle. Included for support purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the WMS has the ability to send some of these additional settings from the Aisles Maintenance screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Rules AND CATEGORIES'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Name&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Type&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Default&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Action Password&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| The password required when RDT functions are password-protected&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| FRAGGLEROCK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ad Hoc Deconsolidation&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Are deconsolidation tasks sequenced manually or by the system?&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Aisle Length&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| The length of the Aisle portion of the Location code.&lt;br /&gt;
| 33&lt;br /&gt;
| 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Exchange Replen&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If the Warehouse is Block Stack, allow Replens to be exchanged as well&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Overpicking&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to enter a picked quantity which is greater than that required by the order.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Task Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS checks for outstanding tasks to give to the user before asking WMS whether the pallet is available for exchange&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Batch Delivery Process&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable creation of flat files for the Batch Carton Delivery process.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bay Length&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| The length of the Bay portion of the Location code&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke BHS No Mixed Stock&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Disables some of the generic Mixed Stock functionality in the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke Kraft Batch&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Remove non-alphabetic characters from the start of the Batch&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke No Batch Prompt&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is enabled, no customer’s batch will be prompted when entering pallet details, even if the WMS has requested that one is entered.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke Nokia Stock Take Imps&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is enabled, only the impression quantity will be prompted for when checking impression stock&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke Site Rule&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Site identity defining which bespoke rules are to apply&lt;br /&gt;
| 9001&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Block Stack&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Enables some RDT functions to exchange pallets&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Close GRN&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow RDT users to close GRNs at the end of the receipt process, by asking them to confirm that the GRN is now complete.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Concurrent Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow loads to be picked concurrently with other loads, when picking by aisle. This stops new loads being started by pickers until the current load has been fully allocated to pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Conveyor Input Spur&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Conveyor Input Spur Location. Required for RDT Reject Spur Processing&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Conveyor Input Spur CD&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Conveyor Input Spur Check Digits. Required for RDT Reject Spur Processing&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Conveyor Input Spur Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Conveyor Input Spur Type. Required for RDT Reject Spur Processing&lt;br /&gt;
| 28&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Conveyor Reject Spur&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Conveyor Reject Spur Location. Required for RDT Reject Spur Processing&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Conveyor Reject Spur CD&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Conveyor Reject Spur Check Digits. Required for RDT Reject Spur Processing&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Conveyor Reject Spur Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Conveyor Reject Spur Type. Required for RDT Reject Spur Processing&lt;br /&gt;
| 28&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Deconsolidation Method&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether Deconsolidation tasks are processed by the WCS&lt;br /&gt;
| 31&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Company Code&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the default company code that the RDT will log on to.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Putaway Location&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Putaway Location CD&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Putaway Location Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| 28&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Receiving Location&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Receiving Location. If entered, the RDT Receipt Module allows the user to choose a receiving location, which defaults to this parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Receiving Location CD&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Receiving Location Check Digits&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Receiving Location Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Receiving Location Type&lt;br /&gt;
| 28&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Delete Records&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| When this option is checked, completed tasks are deleted from the WCS database. All logging is still in place. When un-checked, the completed tasks are marked for deletion by the cleardown process.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Despatch Label Format&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Format of the despatch label&lt;br /&gt;
| 25&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Display Order Summary&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Defines when the order summary screen is displayed on the RDT during part picking.&lt;br /&gt;
| 42&lt;br /&gt;
| S&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Change Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user to change the default warehouse they can see&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Comms&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to the RDT Comms menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Comms (Enquiry Only)&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user Enquiry-only access to the top 2 items on the RDT Comms menu.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Logs&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Logs Enquiry screens in the System Tools menu&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Report&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Reports menu&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| System Settings&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the System Settings option on the System Tools menu. NOTE: This option should only be enabled for super-users, and even then should only be enabled sparingly.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Standing Data&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to all items on the Standing Data menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be. NOTE: This option will allow users to see other users’ passwords, and should therefore be limited only to those users who require it.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Standing Data (Enquiry Only)&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Enquiry screens only on the Standing Data menu&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Task Edit&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user full access to all the screens on the Tasks menu. If this is enabled, the following option need not be.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Task (Enquiry Only)&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to all the screens on the Tasks menu, but for enquiry purposes only.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clear-down options&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Clear-Out options on the System Tools menu. NOTE: This should only be available for super-users.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Compact Database&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allows the user access to the Compact Database option on the System Tools menu.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Check Digits?&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Does the warehouse use check digits, or just location codes?&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Customer Pallet No&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Display customer pallet number on the RDT&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Dual Cycling&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If this is enabled, the RDT logon procedure allows users to choose whether they work in Bulk (NA areas) or not. Depending on this choice, the RDT displays Dual Cycling options for the users.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Encoded Sell By Dates?&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Use encoded sell by dates?&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Lock Pick Header &lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Lock the picking header record for full pallet picking/load building&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Hold Priority&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This allows the lowest priority in the WCS to be used as a Held status. When this option is checked, and tasks on priority 9 will not be allocated to RDTs to complete. To release the tasks, re-prioritise the task to a higher level.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mixed Stock&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Do you have mixed-stock pallets?&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Multi-Pallet Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow several pallets to be picked up during putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Multi-UOM processing&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the WCS deals with multiple UOMs&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Pack Size Entry&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is enabled, pack size will be prompted for when entering pallet details for impression stock&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Dependencies&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Ensure part picks are not released for picking until any outstanding replenishment has been completed first&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picker Replens&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow pickers to perform their own replens at the point of picking the part picks.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ad Hoc Move&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow instigation of a housekeeping Move from the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ad Hoc Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Ad Hoc Putaway for shelving locations. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Bulk PI&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Perpetual Inventory (ad hoc stock check).&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Cancellation&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow cancellation on the RDTs? This option can be over-ridden by the Group setting&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable RDT Cherry Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Choose an order to pick from&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Combined Split (Bespoke)&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Ad hoc movements of small quantities of stock to other locations&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Continuous Part Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| When part picking, asks the user whether they want to continue part picking (i.e. build a despatch pallet from several pick lines).&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Damages&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Damage quantity entry during Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT DC Aisle Selection&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| If using Dual Cycling, this parameter controls whether the user is allowed to select a range of Aisles in which to work, or simply accept the default aisle range entered against the user.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Deconsolidation&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow deconsolidation of consolidated orders.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Despatch&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow despatch of deconsolidated orders.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Despatch Serial No’s &lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow entering serial numbers for picked items. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Echo Putaway Location&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If enabled, this parameter makes the RDT Receiving process display the suggested putaway location after successfully receiving a pallet.&lt;br /&gt;
| 19&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Eurodate&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Enter Eurodate rather than Manufacture Date&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Layers&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Layers and Bits at Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Loading&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Loading onto a vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Location Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to enquire on the contents of a location from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mail&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow receipt of messages from Maintenance administrators. (Generally, this should always be enabled).&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Marshalling&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Not Yet Implemented.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Measure Qty&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Measure Quantity to be entered on the RDT&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Move Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT to see where a pallet is going.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Select Movements&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow cherry-picking of an individual Move task.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pallet Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to enquire on the contents of a pallet from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pallet Move&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Full-Pallet Movements generated from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Part Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Case and Unit picks from the RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Lost Label &lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether a user is allowed to identify a pallet during picking from its stock information (stock code, batch, etc) rather than entering the pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Location Error&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT picker to cancel a pick at the point of confirming the location code.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to complete Full-pallet Picks.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Pop Up Description&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Pop up description of stock on RDT screen&lt;br /&gt;
| 38&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Full-Pallet Putaway.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Blind (Stock level) and Check (Pallet level) Goods Receipt.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Serial No’s&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow entering serial numbers for received items. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Additional Pallets&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow additional pallets to be received during the RDT receipt process&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Reject Spur Processing&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Reject Spur Processing. Bespoke to automated conveyor and P&amp;amp;D systems. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Moves&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow completion (and/or generation) of a Replenishment. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Reposition&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow reposition on the RDTs? This option can be over-ridden by the Group setting&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Select Replen&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Select Replenishment. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Shipment Pallet Building&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Building. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Shipment Pallet Despatch&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Despatch. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Shipment Pallet Moves&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Shipment Pallet Moves. Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Enquiry (Bespoke)&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: Enquire on Stock code&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Move&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Stock Moves (request replenishment of pick face). Bespoke.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Take&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Full (Blind) and Partial (Check) Stock Check.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Weighing&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the RDT user to Weight Shipment Packages.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Weight&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow Weight to be entered on the RDT&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Replen Dependency&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| This rule controls whether the number of replenishment moves into a pick face are limited. Also, that the replen associated with the highest priority pick is released first, whilst all others are held.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Generate Replen&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Let WCS Generate Replenishments&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Pack Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Prompt for the pack type when picking. This is for the carton sizes when pack records are created.&lt;br /&gt;
| 41&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Pick Station&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Identify the picking station at the start of part picking&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter WMS Rotation&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to enter Rotation during Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Exclude Blocked Moves from Priority Calc&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Whilst calculating the priority of moves within an aisle, exclude moves which cannot currently be completed, due to blocked P&amp;amp;D locations.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Extended Reposition Validation&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the WCS performs extended checks when a reposition location is chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File FTP Location&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The location where files are to be found on the FTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
| 24&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File FTP Password&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The password for logging into the FTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
| 26&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File FTP Server&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The server where flat files are sent.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File FTP User&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The user for logging into the FTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flat File Location&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| Bespoke: The location where files are to be located on the FTP server.&lt;br /&gt;
| 24&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Force Sky Picking&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Are part pick tasks from bulk treated as sky picks?&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Residual Stock Balance Enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether the RDT user is prompted to enter the amount of remaining stock in the pick face after a part pick. The WCS requests the WMS to find the current quantity of stock in the pick face.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Level Length&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| The length of the Level portion of the Location code.&lt;br /&gt;
| 35&lt;br /&gt;
| 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Load before Pick Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether the WCS will allow loading to be done before the entire order has been Pick Confirmed in the WMS&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Loading Method&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Loading Method in use for the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
| 20&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Loading Selection Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether the RDT initially asks the user to load stock by Route/Load or Order Number. This can be changed by the user when loading.&lt;br /&gt;
| 37&lt;br /&gt;
| R&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Log Path&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Logging database – When this option is checked, you will be prompted to enter a location for the logging database. THIS OPTION MUST NOT BE CHANGED IF THE WCS SERVER IS RUNNING. When this is done, the logging files in the normal database are no longer used – a new database will be created in the defined area and the WCS server will begin all logging to this database instead. All options in the WCS that use these logging files will now use the new database instead. The logging files are: Error log; Incoming log; Outgoing log; RDT Activities and; Exceptions.&lt;br /&gt;
| 25&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Move Efficient&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Location or priority efficiency&lt;br /&gt;
| 05&lt;br /&gt;
| L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NADC Aisle Lock&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| The point at which an aisle is locked to prevent other RDTs using the aisle&lt;br /&gt;
| 32&lt;br /&gt;
| L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NADC Crossover Method&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| The method by which the RDT NA drivers are moved to another aisle in their range during Dual Cycling.&lt;br /&gt;
| 18&lt;br /&gt;
| T&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NADC Skip Putaway&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow full NADC users to skip putaways in aisles, and do the next pick immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| NADC Threshold Priority&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If using the Threshold crossover method, this parameter details the level at which tasks are considered urgent, to be actioned immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
| 17&lt;br /&gt;
| 4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Nokia Barcodes&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| This rule controls whether the RDT will expect to scan Nokia barcode labels&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Database&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| The database the WCS connects to for the messages.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Incoming Queue Name&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| The Oracle queue on which Incoming messages are stored. Outgoing messages are stored by messages type on the queues defined in the table ORA Type Queues.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Password&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| The password of the user for the connection to the Oracle database.&lt;br /&gt;
| 26&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora User&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| The username for the connection to the Oracle database&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Pallet Enquiry Label Format&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Format of pallet enquiry label&lt;br /&gt;
| 25&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pallet Enquiry Print Labels&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls if pallet label can be printed from a pallet enquiry&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PC Generation Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
| OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Algorithm to generate Picking Containers&lt;br /&gt;
| 9002&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PC Prefix&lt;br /&gt;
| OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Prefix for automatically-generated Picking Container&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick By&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls what the RDT prompts for as confirmation that the correct item has been found for picking&lt;br /&gt;
| 23&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick By Carton&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick a quantity of stock by scanning individual cartons.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Consolidation Group&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| For Consolidated picking: How to create groups of picks.&lt;br /&gt;
| 10&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick In Sequence&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If picks have been placed on a Load, what sequence should orders be released for picking?&lt;br /&gt;
| 36&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Into Containers&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls whether RDT Part Picking prompts for Picking Container IDs&lt;br /&gt;
| 39&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Label Prompt&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Where should pick labels be prompted for?&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| P&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pick Page Allocation&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| This controls how the WCS allocates picks to pickers.&lt;br /&gt;
| 12&lt;br /&gt;
| P&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picker Replen by Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow pickers, when doing their own replenishments, to replenish areas by stock moves, not pallet moves.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Picks by Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allocates pick tasks to the RDT users by quantity, largest first.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Print Despatch Labels&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Whether the RDT attempts to print despatch labels for picked stock.&lt;br /&gt;
| 30&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Purchase Order Entry&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Enable Purchase Order entry during RF goods receipt, if the receipt contains lines from multiple Purchase Orders.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Queue Listener Agent&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| The Oracle agent defines which messages to take from the Oracle database queues, and what Agent to write them as. Each instance of the WCS has a unique Agent name, usually per warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Wait Time&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the amount of time that the RDT will wait before re-trying communications.&lt;br /&gt;
| 04&lt;br /&gt;
| 20&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT_WCS LocalPort&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the port that the WCS listens to for communications from RDTs.&lt;br /&gt;
| 04&lt;br /&gt;
| 15002&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Default Pallet Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| During Goods Receipt, whether the RDT user is prompted for a valid Pallet Type at the start of the receipt. This will then be the default for all pallets subsequently received during that session for that user. Without this item being enabled, pressing ‘RETURN’ in the pallet type field against a received pallet will tell WMS to default to its Default Pallet Type.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Enter Receipt Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the user to enter the receipt type in RDT Goods Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Impressions Check&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If the impressions quantity for a stock item is different to the impressions quantity preadvised, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take. Only for preadvices at pallet level.&lt;br /&gt;
| 22&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Receipt Label Format&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Format of the receipt label printed, if printed from the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
| 25&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Non-advised Stock Codes&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Is the user allowed to receive stock codes that have not been preadvised for that receipt?&lt;br /&gt;
| 22&lt;br /&gt;
| E&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Pallet Count Check&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If the number of pallets on a received stock item exceeds that preadvised, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take.&lt;br /&gt;
| 22&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Pallet Qty Check (Pallet)&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If the pallet quantity for a stock item is different to the pallet quantity preadvised, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take. Only for preadvices at a pallet level.&lt;br /&gt;
| 22&lt;br /&gt;
| A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Print Labels&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Controls where/if pallet labels are printed during the receipt process&lt;br /&gt;
| 21&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Selection Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| How to find the receipt on the RDT - via Advice Note or GRN no.&lt;br /&gt;
| 08&lt;br /&gt;
| A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Single Scan Entry for Additional Pallets&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow users to scan single barcode for entry of some required elements for adding additional pallets&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Standard Qty Check (Stock)&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If the pallet quantity for a stock item is different to the standard pallet quantity, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take. Only for preadvices at stock level.&lt;br /&gt;
| 22&lt;br /&gt;
| I&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Total Qty Stock Check&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If the quantity of a stock item exceeds the total preadvised, this parameter details the action the RDT is to take.&lt;br /&gt;
| 22&lt;br /&gt;
| E&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Receipt Type&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| How the RDT actions the Receipt process – either Blind (stock-level advice) or Check (Pallet-level advice)&lt;br /&gt;
| 07&lt;br /&gt;
| B&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Request Putaway Details at Scan&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Require the WMS to decide on a putaway location at the time of putaway scan, rather than at receipt&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Seamless Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is set, the RDT will check whether an exchange can be done immediately, without requiring the user to press the Error function key first.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Send Aisle Status to WMS&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| For NA areas: Inform the WMS that the aisle has a truck in it.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ship Pack Weight Check&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If a weight entered during the Shipment Package Weight function is outside the tolerance value, what action should the RDT take?&lt;br /&gt;
| 22&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Stock Take Enter GRN&lt;br /&gt;
| OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| When adding pallets during Stock Take or Perpetual Inventory, request the user to enter a GRN number&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Task Identifier&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Which field to use to identify pallets&lt;br /&gt;
| 06&lt;br /&gt;
| P&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Use Dummy Checksum&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| Used to terminate the interface messages with a dummy checksum value (??)&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Use WMS Rotation &lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If this rule is set, wherever Customer Batch is displayed or entered during Picking or Deconsolidation, the RDT will display or request the entry of WMS Rotation instead.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| User Select Pick Location&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER, GRP&lt;br /&gt;
| Is the user allowed to specify the location from which picking to start?&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Vendor Managed Inventory&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If this flag is enabled, supplier will be displayed and entered during standard RF modules&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Exclude Source to Dest moves from WA DC&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Ensures WA DC (interleaving) focuses more on emptying P&amp;amp;D locations rather than completing housekeeping moves.&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS_WMS RemotePort&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the port that the WMS listens to for communications from the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
| 04&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Weigh Shipment Package&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| Allow the entry and validation of the Catch Weight during the Shipment Pallet Building process&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Weight Tolerance&lt;br /&gt;
| WHSE, OWNER&lt;br /&gt;
| If weights are being checked by the Shipment Package functions, what tolerance is allowed (plus or minus, in kilograms)?&lt;br /&gt;
| 40&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Window Caption&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This field changes the displayed name of the WCS Server process, when running. This is useful when running multiple systems on one site or one server.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| Warehouse Control Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WMS HostName&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the IP address or host/DNS name of the WMS machine.&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*****&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WMS to WCS Try Limit&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the amount of times the WCS will try to send a message to the WMS, if the message has been refused, before logging the error and trying the next.&lt;br /&gt;
| 04&lt;br /&gt;
| 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WMS_WCS LocalPort&lt;br /&gt;
| SYS&lt;br /&gt;
| This is the port that the WCS listens to for communications from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
| 04&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Category&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Value&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 01&lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y-Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 02&lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-Password-Protected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y-Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 03&lt;br /&gt;
| Plain Text&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 04&lt;br /&gt;
| Plain Numeric&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 05&lt;br /&gt;
| L-By Location&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-By Priority&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 06&lt;br /&gt;
| C-By Cust Pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-By Pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| S-By Stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 07&lt;br /&gt;
| B-Blind Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| C-Check Receipt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 08&lt;br /&gt;
| A-By Advice No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| G-By GRN No&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 09&lt;br /&gt;
| L-By Load Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| O-By Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 10&lt;br /&gt;
| N-None&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| S-By Stock/Batch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 11&lt;br /&gt;
| C-Combo Check&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y-Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 12&lt;br /&gt;
| A-By Aisle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| L-By Load/Aisle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-By Order Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| R-By Reference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 13&lt;br /&gt;
| Date&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 14&lt;br /&gt;
| E-Error&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| I-Information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| W-Warning&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 15&lt;br /&gt;
| F-Full/Blind&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-Preadvised/Partial&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 16&lt;br /&gt;
| A-Area (m2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| I-Impressions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| L-Length (m)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Q-Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| V-Volume (m3)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| W-Weight (kg)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 17&lt;br /&gt;
| Priority Values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 18&lt;br /&gt;
| M-Manual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| T-Threshold&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| W-Weighting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 19&lt;br /&gt;
| 0-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| 1-Fetch Details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| 2-Display Location&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 20&lt;br /&gt;
| C-By Carton&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| F-By Final Media Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| I-By Picking Container&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-By Pick&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| V-By Vehicle/Store/Picking Container&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 21&lt;br /&gt;
| C-WCS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| M-WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Neither&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 22&lt;br /&gt;
| A-Authorisation Required&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| E-Error&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| I-Informational Message&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-None&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 23&lt;br /&gt;
| B-By Stock and Batch&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-By Pallet ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| S-By Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| V-By Pallet/Stock/Supplier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| X-By Pallet and Stock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 24&lt;br /&gt;
| Plain Text (with directory Browser)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 25&lt;br /&gt;
| Plain Text (with File browser)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 26&lt;br /&gt;
| Plain Text (password text)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 27&lt;br /&gt;
| Date (with Date Picker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 28&lt;br /&gt;
| Plain Text (with Location Type lookup)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 29&lt;br /&gt;
| M-Marshalling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-Pick&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 30&lt;br /&gt;
| D-Per Despatch Pallet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-Per Pick&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| R-Request Quantity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| W-WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 31&lt;br /&gt;
| D-Deconsolidate Only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-Deconsolidate and Pack&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 32&lt;br /&gt;
| A-At Allocation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| L-At Location&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 33&lt;br /&gt;
| Aisle Length&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 34&lt;br /&gt;
| Bay Length&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 35&lt;br /&gt;
| Level Length&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 36&lt;br /&gt;
| A-By Drop Sequence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| D-By Reverse Drop Sequence&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 37&lt;br /&gt;
| O-By Order Number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| R-By Route/Load&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 38&lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-Pick Only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| R-Goods Receipt Only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y-Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 39&lt;br /&gt;
| G-Generate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| P-Password_Protected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| T-Pre-Set Tray Values&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y-Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 40&lt;br /&gt;
| Decimal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 41&lt;br /&gt;
| M-At Marshalling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| S-At Start&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 42&lt;br /&gt;
| E-At Each Dispatch Pallet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| N-Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| S-At Start Only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 9001&lt;br /&gt;
| -Standard site (No bespoke rules)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| BIBBY-Bibby&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| CERT-Cert&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| FWLMA-XKO Sites&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| NIJ-DHL EXEL Healthcare&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| SCH-Schenker&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| TBI-DHL EXEL Dublin RHR&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| TBW-DHL EXEL Whitwood&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| TNT-TNT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| JJD-JJD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Printing from the WCS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways in which printers can be set up for WCS use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The printers can be fixed or wireless.&lt;br /&gt;
* They can be Windows printers (networked or direct connect), UNIX queues or Wireless (via TCP/IP settings).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all except wireless, this requires the set-up of a Windows printer (or queue). The WCS is then informed of the printer’s existence using the WCS Maintenance Printers Maintenance form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Although these methods can be used for standard network printers, it is recommended that the printer then be used exclusively for WCS printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Setting Up Wired Windows Printers'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The printer must first be set up on the RDT or WCS server. This should be done following your network administration policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this is completed in Windows, the printer must then be set up for the WCS to recognise. To do this, use the WCS Maintenance Printers Maintenance screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Wireless Printing'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set up a Windows printer for the wireless printer, using the TCP/IP settings or, more commonly, the WCS can be set up for direct printing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Windows Queue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This method is extremely similar to setting up Windows printers (see ), but the method for setting up the Windows queue is different. You should follow your network administration policy for setting up printer queues. The following demonstrates how the printer would be set up:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a new printer from the Control Panel. Choose to set up a local printer, and choose the option to create a new port, as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose Standard TCP/IP port. At this point, you will be taken through the following wizard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this port is added, the first Windows Printer wizard will be completed, and allow you to test print.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this is completed in Windows, the printer must then be set up for the WCS to recognise. To do this, use the WCS Maintenance Printers Maintenance screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Direct Connect'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note: '''This is the normal set-up for wireless printing in the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this option, the printer merely needs to be set up within the WCS Maintenance Printers Maintenance screen.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=Installation_Guide&amp;diff=3</id>
		<title>Installation Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=Installation_Guide&amp;diff=3"/>
		<updated>2009-05-13T11:55:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: New page: = INTRODUCTION = This document is intended to show the series of steps required to install all parts of Calidus 3PL-Mobile (the WCS) on a server and client PCs. This covers the following a...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= INTRODUCTION =&lt;br /&gt;
This document is intended to show the series of steps required to install all parts of Calidus 3PL-Mobile (the WCS) on a server and client PCs. This covers the following areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Installation of the full system on a WCS Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Installation of the WCS on a WCS server&lt;br /&gt;
* Installation of the above for the Oracle FSCE.&lt;br /&gt;
* Installation of the RDT on an RDT or Test server&lt;br /&gt;
* Installation of administrative functions of Client PCs&lt;br /&gt;
* Installation of patches&lt;br /&gt;
* Backup and Resilience Guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appendices are provided to show the main programs installed on the target PC and also the Start menu items created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also provided are appendices detailing: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* How to choose languages for the RDT application&lt;br /&gt;
* How to use the RDT Debug process to simplify testing of the WCS&lt;br /&gt;
* How to install and configure Wavelink servers and clients.&lt;br /&gt;
* Other WCS applications and their uses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installation of full Calidus 3PL-Mobile =&lt;br /&gt;
== Run Installer ==&lt;br /&gt;
Run the full WCS installer and follow the on-screen instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default working directory for the install is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a list of programs installed see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a list of shortcuts created for the installer see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authorising the WCS ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Some versions of the WCS do not require an authorisation code to be entered. If this is the case, this step can be skipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorise the WCS following the instructions in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shares ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCS Server PC is being connected to from an external machine, or the WCS Server has several disks, you may wish to define certain share areas on the machine and use those when accessing the system. Those shares are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Share'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Description'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS$&lt;br /&gt;
| The main directory {Installation Path}\Warehouse Control Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSDB$&lt;br /&gt;
| The main database directory {Installation Path}\Warehouse Control Server\database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSRPT$&lt;br /&gt;
| The reports directory {Installation Path}\Warehouse Control Server\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSL$&lt;br /&gt;
| Logging database path (if different to main database path. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSI$&lt;br /&gt;
| The WCS installer and documents directory, copied from the CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you could set up network drives pointing to these shares.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initialise Database ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Start Menu, under the WCS Utilities group will be an item ‘Initialise database’. This program will ask you questions about how the system is set up, and how you want it to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initially, the program should ask you to identify the database you are using. This should automatically show you the database ‘rdt1.mdb’, in the ‘…/database’ area. You should choose this database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 1 – WMS Communication settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you are prompted for IP addresses and port numbers for the WCS connectivity. The IP address should be that of your WMS. The port numbers should be those set up in the WMS interface programs (usually available in ‘$RDT_LOCATION/start_int’).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are also prompted for a retry count. This is best set at 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 2 – WCS Communication settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you are prompted for settings that directly affect the WCS communications. The WCS IP address should already be set, as the IP address of the machine on which you are running. The RDT to WCS port the communication channel for RDT processes to talk to the WCS server, and is best left at the default, 15002. The next parameter is the maximum wait time for a response from the WCS server. This may be left at the default value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 3 – WCS Database settings 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts for 2 flags for how the WCS database will work. The first item (delete records) should be checked, to keep the database size down. The second flag (Use Hold Status) may be checked or un-checked, but the functionality is useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 4 – Default Company Code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for a default company code for the WCS. This is a mandatory, 3-character field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 5 – Default Warehouse ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for a mandatory 3-character Warehouse ID. The WCS is a multi-warehouse system, this is simply a default to set one warehouse up for you first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 6 – System Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for some system settings. The field ‘Check Digits’ controls whether the RDT prompts for a 3-character check digit for confirmation of location. The field ‘Block Stack’ controls whether the system allows users to exchange pallets for other, similar pallets. The field ‘Customer Pallet ID’ controls whether the system moves pallets by a WMS-generated pallet ID or by a customer-generated pallet ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 7 – Receipt Settings 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for whether catch weights and measure quantities are prompted for by the RDTs. Commonly, these flags are not set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 8 – Receipt Settings 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for some generic receipt settings. The first set of radio buttons govern the type of receipt you run. The first (Check) receipt allows pallets to be preadvised to a pallet level. Blind receipt receives against the stock code preadvice. The second radio buttons decide how you identify Goods receipts ''by default''. This can always be changed when in the receipt module on an RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 9 – Pick Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page contains some default settings for Pick (Picker Replenishments and Pick Check). Both should be disabled at present, and can be enabled later if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 10 – Default Admin user&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts whether a default user will be set up for you, called ADM with the same password (encrypted in the database). This will allow you to log on to WCS Maintenance without having sent any further data from the WMS, allowing you to complete set-up. This should be checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' This user is set up with access to the Maintenance functions ONLY. RDT users can be enabled using the maintenance functions. This is described in other documents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 11 – WCS Database Settings 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default clear-down folder – accept default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default reports folder – accept default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External database – This allows all logging information to be stored in a separate database, allowing more data to be stored. For testing, this should be disabled, for simplicity. For live, this should be set up to be in the same area as the normal WCS database (rdt1.mdb), normally called ‘logX.mdb’, where X is a version number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On completing the form, the program should update all tables, and the system will be ready to log on to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Run WCS Maintenance ==&lt;br /&gt;
Start WCS maintenance from the shortcut on the start menu under the group ‘Warehouse Control Server’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the appropriate database from the file list or the Browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The database should be available from the ‘Warehouse Control Server/Database’ area. It should be called ‘rdt1.mdb’. Browse for this, using the ‘More Files…’ option of the file list. Once you have selected the database once, the database will remain on the file list for you to select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Log in using the ADM user set up for you by the ‘Initialiser’ process. '''Note:''' The password is case-sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once in, go to the System Settings screen, using either the toolbar or the menus (''System Tools/System Settings'').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Apply, then OK in this form. That sets the settings for Maintenance up, as well as an ‘INI’ file for the maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also available from this form is the ability to configure the WCS system settings (from the ‘WCS’ tab. In here, the name displayed on the WCS Server form can be modified to show something more suitable (such as ‘WCS Test’, ‘WCS Live – DO NOT STOP’, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Install Wavelink StudioCOM ==&lt;br /&gt;
The installation instructions for this process are available in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start WCS Server ==&lt;br /&gt;
The system is now set up on the server. To start the WCS Server, choose the relevant option from the ‘''Warehouse Control Server''’ group on the Start menu. For testing, an option is included that writes full communication logging to files in the default directory area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' If the WCS requires authorisation, but this authorisation is invalid, the WCS-Server process will inform you of the problem at this point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The program should start, and show you a simple form, showing the connection status of the WMS (should start as ‘Idle’), and the connection status of any RDTs (should start as ‘Idle’). The title of the WCS Server form is set to ‘Warehouse Control Server’ by default. However, this can be changed using WCS Maintenance as shown in above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! WMS Connections&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Idle&lt;br /&gt;
| No connection from the WMS. Probably the WMS interface is not started.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Connected&lt;br /&gt;
| Fully Connected – normal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No WMS - WCS&lt;br /&gt;
| The WCS is connected to send, but no connection exists from the WMS for receiving tasks into the WCS. This can occur quite often. The next time the WMS has something to send, it may connect automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No WCS-WMS&lt;br /&gt;
| The WCS is connected to receive tasks, but no connection exists to send completed tasks to the WMS. This is serious, and is usually a problem with the connection settings in the WCS, or the interface settings on the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Table 1 – WMS connection statuses''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''RDT Connections'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Description'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Idle&lt;br /&gt;
| No RDTs are currently connected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Connected (X)&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows (X) RDTs are connected, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Table 2 – RDT Connection statuses''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== WCS Server Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
WCS Server has some options available from the file menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Launch Maintenance Program – this option launches WCS Maintenance, if installed on the PC (It should be for this installation). Maintenance will not require you to choose the database – it will be started with the database that the WCS Server is currently using.&lt;br /&gt;
* New Password – Change the password required for the WCS Server to be stopped.&lt;br /&gt;
* Compact Database – Clean up the WCS database. This will only be successful if there are no maintenance users using the database.&lt;br /&gt;
* Clear Out Pre-advice Tables – This should no longer be required. &lt;br /&gt;
* Exit – Quit WCS Server. A password is required to stop the WCS Server application. This is pre-set to ‘password’, but can be changed using the appropriate option above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a logging menu, which allows the logging options of the WCS to be set. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first two options toggle the way the WCS logs its incoming and outgoing logs for the system. If the system is logging to Table, the data is placed in the main or logging databases. If the system is logging to File, the data is placed in text files located in the main program directory. This is normally C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\Comms Logs. New logs will be created every day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The File logging options should be enabled if the system is live, stable and the quantity of incoming and outgoing messages is high. Otherwise, the Table logging method should be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The final option turns logging on for communication messages between the WCS and specific RDTs. The log is a text file, placed in the Comms Logs directory, as above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With all the above switches, the WCS remembers the values last set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start WMS Interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
Several documents already exist describing the set-up and starting of the WMS interface programs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once running, however, the status on the WCS should change to ‘Connected’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installing WCS-Server =&lt;br /&gt;
This installer is required if you are running lots of RDTs for one system, or if you require geographically separate sites running on the same WCS. In the former case, a limitation of Windows PCs is that there are a finite number of processes that can be run on the machine at one time. In the latter case, having a local RDT server and separate WCS Server reduces network traffic over the WAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Run Installer ==&lt;br /&gt;
Run the WCSS installer and follow the on-screen instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default working directory for the install is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a list of programs installed see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a list of shortcuts created for the installer see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authorising the WCS ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Some versions of the WCS do not require an authorisation code to be entered. If this is the case, this step can be skipped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorise the WCS following the instructions in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shares ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCS Server PC is being connected to from an external machine, or the WCS Server has several disks, you may wish to define certain share areas on the machine and use those when accessing the system. Those shares are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Share&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS$&lt;br /&gt;
| The main directory {Installation Path}\Warehouse Control Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSDB$&lt;br /&gt;
| The main database directory {Installation Path}\Warehouse Control Server\database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSRPT$&lt;br /&gt;
| The reports directory {Installation Path}\Warehouse Control Server\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSL$&lt;br /&gt;
| Logging database path (if different to main database path. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSI$&lt;br /&gt;
| The WCS installer and documents directory, copied from the CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you could set up network drives pointing to these shares.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initialise Database ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Start Menu, under the WCS Utilities group will be an item ‘Initialise database’. This program will ask you questions about how the system is set up, and how you want it to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initially, the program should ask you to identify the database you are using. This should automatically show you the database ‘rdt1.mdb’, in the ‘…/database’ area. You should choose this database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 1 – WMS Communication settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you are prompted for IP addresses and port numbers for the WCS connectivity. The IP address should be that of your WMS. The port numbers should be those set up in the WMS interface programs (usually available in ‘$RDT_LOCATION/start_int’).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are also prompted for a retry count. This is best set at 3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 2 – WCS Communication settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you are prompted for settings that directly affect the WCS communications. The WCS IP address should already be set, as the IP address of the machine on which you are running. The RDT to WCS port the communication channel for RDT processes to talk to the WCS server, and is best left at the default, 15002. The next parameter is the maximum wait time for a response from the WCS server. This may be left at the default value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 3 – WCS Database settings 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts for 2 flags for how the WCS database will work. The first item (delete records) should be checked, to keep the database size down. The second flag (Use Hold Status) may be checked or un-checked, but the functionality is useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 4 – Default Company Code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for a default company code for the WCS. This is a mandatory, 3-character field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 5 – Default Warehouse ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for a mandatory 3-character Warehouse ID. The WCS is a multi-warehouse system, this is simply a default to set one warehouse up for you first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 6 – System Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for some system settings. The field ‘Check Digits’ controls whether the RDT prompts for a 3-character check digit for confirmation of location. The field ‘Block Stack’ controls whether the system allows users to exchange pallets for other, similar pallets. The field ‘Customer Pallet ID’ controls whether the system moves pallets by a WMS-generated pallet ID or by a customer-generated pallet ID.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 7 – Receipt Settings 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for whether catch weights and measure quantities are prompted for by the RDTs. Commonly, these flags are not set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 8 – Receipt Settings 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts you for some generic receipt settings. The first set of radio buttons govern the type of receipt you run. The first (Check) receipt allows pallets to be preadvised to a pallet level. Blind receipt receives against the stock code preadvice. The second radio buttons decide how you identify Goods receipts ''by default''. This can always be changed when in the receipt module on an RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 9 – Pick Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page contains some default settings for Pick (Picker Replenishments and Pick Check). Both should be disabled at present, and can be enabled later if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 10 – Default Admin user&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page prompts whether a default user will be set up for you, called ADM with the same password (encrypted in the database). This will allow you to log on to WCS Maintenance without having sent any further data from the WMS, allowing you to complete set-up. This should be checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' This user is set up with access to the Maintenance functions ONLY. RDT users can be enabled using the maintenance functions. This is described in other documents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Page 11 – WCS Database Settings 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default clear-down folder – accept default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default reports folder – accept default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
External database – This allows all logging information to be stored in a separate database, allowing more data to be stored. For testing, this should be disabled, for simplicity. For live, this should be set up to be in the same area as the normal WCS database (rdt1.mdb), normally called ‘logX.mdb’ , where X is a version number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On completing the form, the program should update all tables, and the system will be ready to log on to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start WCS Server ==&lt;br /&gt;
The system is now set up on the server. To start the WCS Server, choose the relevant option from the ‘Warehouse Control Server’ group on the Start menu. For testing, an option is included that writes full communication logging to files in the default directory area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' If the WCS requires authorisation, but this authorisation is invalid, the WCS-Server process will inform you of the problem at this point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The program should start, and show you a simple form, showing the connection status of the WMS (should start as ‘Idle’), and the connection status of any RDTs (should start as ‘Idle’).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! WMS Connections&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Idle&lt;br /&gt;
| No connection from the WMS. Probably the WMS interface is not started.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Connected&lt;br /&gt;
| Fully Connected – normal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No WMS - WCS&lt;br /&gt;
| The WCS is connected to send, but no connection exists from the WMS for receiving tasks into the WCS. This can occur quite often. The next time the WMS has something to send, it may connect automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| No WCS-WMS&lt;br /&gt;
| The WCS is connected to receive tasks, but no connection exists to send completed tasks to the WMS. This is serious, and is usually a problem with the connection settings in the WCS, or the interface settings on the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Table 3 – WMS connection statuses''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''RDT Connections'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Description'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Idle&lt;br /&gt;
| No RDTs are currently connected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Connected (X)&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows (X) RDTs are connected, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Table 4 – RDT Connection statuses''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Start WMS Interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
Several documents already exist describing the set-up and starting of the WMS interface programs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once running, however, the status on the WCS should change to ‘Connected’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Oracle set-up =&lt;br /&gt;
In the previous 2 sections, we have shown how to install the WCS for access to the C-ISAM version of FSCE, version 4.14. In this section, we explore and define the differences in this to installing for connection to the Oracle version of FSCE, version 7.X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The set-up consists of several steps above and beyond the steps outlined above:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Install Oracle 9i Client&lt;br /&gt;
# Install Oracle 9i Windows Objects&lt;br /&gt;
# Update Oracle 9i Visual Basic objects (OO4O)&lt;br /&gt;
# Update the registry for Oracle&lt;br /&gt;
# Install WCS&lt;br /&gt;
# Set up WCS&lt;br /&gt;
# Set up WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Oracle 9i Set-up ==&lt;br /&gt;
Ensure the machine is logged in as the user that will be running the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start the Oracle Client Installation process from the CD. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose '''Install/Deinstall Products'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the '''Runtime Install Only''' option. This will require about 180Mb of space on the PC. Allow to finish, accepting any defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process will start the '''Net Configuration Assistant'''. This needs to be completed at some stage, either now or later, from the '''Start '''menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items required for this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Item Required'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Your Value'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Oracle Service Name''&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Oracle Server IP Address''&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Oracle Server Port number''&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Oracle User''&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ''Oracle Password''&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Choose option '''Local Net Service Name Configuration'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose '''Add'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose '''8i or later'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter ''Oracle Service Name'''.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose '''TCP'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter ''Oracle Server IP Address''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter ''Oracle Server Port number'' (1521 is the default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to '''Test the Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When prompted, change the ''Oracle User ''and ''Oracle Password.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This should then be set up correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Oracle Windows Components ==&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to install more products, this time choosing '''Custom Install'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose to install the '''Oracle Windows Interfaces'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allow to finish, accepting any defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exit the installer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== OO4O Update ==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we need to update the version of OO4O on the machine. Oracle should be updated to 9.2.0.4.8 for OO4O, however, a previous compatible version, 9.2.0.4.5 has also been included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install 9.2.0.4.5 upgrade:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on the '''OO4O92045.exe'''. This will extract the upgrade to a directory of your choice. This executable is found on your WCS installation disk, in the area:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CD Contents\Other Exes\Misc '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has also been extracted for you on the disk, under this area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run '''{Your Directory}\Disk1\install\win32\setup.exe'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will run the Oracle installer as before, installing the upgrade. Simply follow the defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install 9.2.0.4.8 upgrade:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double-click on the '''OraWin9204.exe'''. This will extract the upgrade to a directory of your choice. This executable is found on your WCS installation disk, in the area:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CD Contents\Other Exes\Misc '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has also been extracted for you on the disk, under this area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Run &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{Your Directory}\Disk1\install\win32\setup.exe''' or &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''{Your Directory}\Disk1\setup.exe'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will run the Oracle installer as before, installing the upgrade. Simply follow the defaults for installing Oracle Objects for OLE version 9.2.0.4.8.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A further patch has been provided by Oracle. Full instructions for installing the file are in the directory on the CD. This is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CD Contents\Other Exes\Misc\Oracle 3568386 patch'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update Registry ==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to run the Oracle WCS, the registry must be modified for Oracle. This can be done simply by double-clicking a registry file provided with the installer. This file is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CD Contents\Other Exes\Regutils\VB6-OO40.reg'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will add the required registry entries for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the registry entry can be added manually, as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose '''Run '''from the '''Start '''menu. Run '''Regedit '''from here. If this can’t be run or you are entirely unfamiliar or uncomfortable with this step, check with your system administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check the key:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Microsoft/Visual Basic/6.0/AllowUnsafeObjectPassing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It should be set to a string value '''1'''. If it is not, change it to '''1'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Install WCS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, WCS can be installed in the normal way, as shown in the previous two sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set up WCS ==&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the steps taken to set up the WCS in the previous sections, some other values also need to be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set up Ora settings on the WCS database table System Parameters. These values need to be found now, and entered in the table below. The first three values were found for the Oracle installation, above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Field'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Description'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Your Value'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Database&lt;br /&gt;
| Oracle Service Name&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora User&lt;br /&gt;
| Oracle User&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Password&lt;br /&gt;
| Oracle Password&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ora Incoming Queue Name&lt;br /&gt;
| Queue used by WMS to send data to WCS&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Queue Listener Agent&lt;br /&gt;
| Agent used to identify which WCS is sending the messages.&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The Queue Listener Agent should be the same as that set up on APP_QUEUE.AGENT in the following section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Agent is normally AG_&amp;lt;COMPANY&amp;gt;&amp;lt;WAREHOUSE&amp;gt;, by convention. &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WMS Outgoing queues (on table Ora Type Queues) should be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Message Type&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
! Queue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;601&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;611&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;621&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;631&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;641&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;651&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;661&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;671&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;681&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;691&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;701&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;711&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;721&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;731&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;741&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;751&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Both of these tables can be set up from System Parameters screen in WCS Maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set up WMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Ensure queues are set up on the normal Oracle database. There should be at least the queues shown above:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* QMC&lt;br /&gt;
* QCM1&lt;br /&gt;
* QCM2&lt;br /&gt;
* QCM3&lt;br /&gt;
* QCM4&lt;br /&gt;
* QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speak to your system administrator to ensure that these queues have been set up correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The FSCE table APP_REC must be set up:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! REC_TYPE&lt;br /&gt;
! REC_NAME&lt;br /&gt;
! QUEUE_ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 101&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_PREADV&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 111&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_PMVDREQ&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 121&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_PICKRQ&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 151&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_PREADVDEL&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 161&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_PALDET&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 171&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_WHSMAP&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 181&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_RECTYPUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 191&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_STOCK_TAKE&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 201&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_EMPUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 221&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_LTRKUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 231&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_TRKTYPUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 241&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_LOC_CD&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 251&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_REASONUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 271&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_PALTYPEUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 281&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_AISLESTATUS&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 291&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_OWNDET&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 341&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WMS_PICKRQ&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 601&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_PALCRE&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 611&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_PALMVMNT&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 621&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_PICKUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 631&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_AISLEUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 641&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_WHRECON&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 651&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_STKENQ&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 661&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_STLORTS&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 671&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_STOCK_ADJ&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 681&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_DESPUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 691&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_LOCCHECK&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 701&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_LOADUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 711&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_LOCENQ&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 721&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_OWNCHECK&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 731&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_PRODENQ&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 741&lt;br /&gt;
| TY_WCS_SERIALUPD&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 751&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The FSCE table APP_QUEUE must also be set up&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One set of these records for each Agent required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An Agent defines an instance of the WCS, passing and receiving messages from FSCE. Each WCS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Agent must be unique for each WCS connecting to the system. It must be the same value entered in the WCS set-up section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Agent is normally AG_&amp;lt;COMPANY&amp;gt;&amp;lt;WAREHOUSE&amp;gt;, by convention. &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''ID'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''AGENT '''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''RECEIVER'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM1&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM2&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM3&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM4&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| QCM5&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| WMS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| QMC&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| WCS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The FSCE table APP_WAREHOUSE_Q_SCHEMA_AGENT must also be set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One record is required here, for each company/warehouse combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q_SCHEMA is the schema in which the queues have been declared. This is normally schema SCE in default installations of the FSCE system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''COMPANY'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''WAREHOUSE'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''AGENT'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Q_SCHEMA'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
= Installing an RDT Server =&lt;br /&gt;
This installer is required if you are running lots of RDTs for one system, or if you require geographically separate sites running on the same WCS. In the former case, a limitation of Windows PCs is that there are a finite number of processes that can be run on the machine at one time. In the latter case, having a local RDT server reduces network traffic over the WAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another reason for installing a separate RDT server would be to support multiple languages for the RDT users. The method for changing the language can be seen in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Run Installer ==&lt;br /&gt;
Run the RDT installer and follow the on-screen instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default working directory for the install is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a list of programs installed see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a list of shortcuts created for the installer see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enter the Server IP required ==&lt;br /&gt;
So that the RDT application can connect remotely, the file ‘SERVER_IP.INI’ must be modified to contain the WCS Server’s IP address and WCS-RDT port number. This port number can be found through WCS Maintenance from the ‘System Settings’ option, or alternatively through the Initialise Database application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file is used to store the connection settings the RDTs need. If the file is not created, a default version of the file will be created on initial start-up of an RDT application, defaulting the values to those most commonly used, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Local Machine’s IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
15002&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file should have contents similar to the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“1.0.0.127”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“15002”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the RDT process has not yet run, you must create the file yourself. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first item in the file should be the WCS Server PC’s IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second item should be the WCS-RDT port number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both items should be in quotes (“).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, this step could be completed later, after attempting to run an RDT process through Wavelink. You will get an error on the RDT initially, saying it couldn’t connect to the WCS. Once this has happened, exit the RDT process, and check for the SERVER_IP file then. There should now be one created, and this can be modified rather than created from scratch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Install Wavelink StudioCOM ==&lt;br /&gt;
The installation instructions for this process are available in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this is installed, the RDT Server should be available for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Installing Client WCS Maintenance =&lt;br /&gt;
In this instance, it is assumed that the WCS has been set up on a WCS Server PC, and that the user has access to this PC over the network. The PC should have some shared folders, as specified in section :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ‘''{Installation Path}''\Database’ shared as ‘\\''{WCS Server}''\WCSDB$’ (required)&lt;br /&gt;
* ‘''{Installation Path}''\Bin\Reports’ shared as ‘\\''{WCS Server}''\WCSRPT$’ (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
* ‘''{Installation Path}''\’ shared as ‘\\''{WCS Server}''\WCS$’ (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further assumed that all required standing data has been set up on the WCS and that the user has been provided a valid username and password for access to the WCS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Run Installer ==&lt;br /&gt;
Run the WCSM installer and follow the on-screen instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default working directory for the install is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a list of programs installed see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a list of shortcuts created for the installer see &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Run WCS Maintenance ==&lt;br /&gt;
Start WCS maintenance from the shortcut on the start menu under the group ‘Warehouse Control Server’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the appropriate database from the file list or the Browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be accessing the central WCS database remotely. There are several ways to do this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Browse for the appropriate database using the ‘More Files’ option on the File List. You should be browsing through your Network, looking for the machine on which the WCS has been installed, and choosing the shared Database folder ‘\\''{WCS Server}''\WCSDB$’;&lt;br /&gt;
* Set up a network drive (for our example, we will choose the driver letter “W”), pointing to the ‘Database’ shared folder on the WCS Server PC. Use this driver letter to find the database (rdt1.mdb) in the Browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have selected the database once, the database will remain on the file list for you to select.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Log in using the ADM user set up for you by the ‘Initialiser’ process. '''Note:''' The password is case-sensitive and will be provided to you by OBS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once in, go to the System Settings screen, using either the toolbar or the menus (''System Tools/System Settings'').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Apply, then OK in this form. That sets the settings for Maintenance up, as well as an ‘INI’ file for the maintenance functions, with the normal default values for certain areas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Installation (Optional) ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want the users to use the central installation of WCS Maintenance (for ease of release and support), several steps must be undertaken:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete local WCSMaintenance.exe&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete ‘…/Bin/Reports’ folders&lt;br /&gt;
# Find shortcut to WCS Maintenance, and change it to point to the network-shared file ‘WCS\WCSMaintenance.exe’.&lt;br /&gt;
# Start WCS Maintenance, and point the ''Default Report Files Folder'' location (from the menu ''System Tools/System Settings'', Maintenance Settings tab) to shared Reports folder ‘\\''{WCS Server}''\WCSRPT$’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should then be running a remote version of the programs, and remote versions of the reports, but be using your local ‘Maintenance.ini’ file, allowing you to customise the use of some of the screens just for you, without affecting other network users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Updating the WCS =&lt;br /&gt;
There are two mechanisms for upgrading the WCS installation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Manual&lt;br /&gt;
# Semi-automatic&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Upgrade area of the WCS installation contains the file WCS_Upgrade_Install, then the semi-automatic upgrade path can be followed. Instructions for installing the Semi-Automatic Upgrade modules can be seen in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manual Upgrade ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preparations for Upgrade ===&lt;br /&gt;
Initially, the WCS-Server must be stopped and any WCS Maintenance users must log off the database. RF users must log off the system. If the WCS is to be fully upgraded via an installer, or the RDT processes themselves are being patched, ''all ''RDT users must log off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this is completed, it is normal to create a backup of all the files. This would include renaming the old database. Normally, this would be ‘rdtX.mdb’, where ‘X’ is an incrementing number. For this example, let use say that the database is renamed from ‘rdt1.mdb’ to ‘rdt2.mdb’. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If updating via patch, the patch should be placed into the Upgrade area in the Warehouse Control Server folder. This is normally one of the following or similar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\Database\Update&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\Database\Upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\Database\Release&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If updating via an installer, the processes can now be uninstalled, then re-installed from the provided installer CD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Performing the Upgrade ===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Upgrade area and extract the patch. This is normally achieved by double-clicking the file and extracting the data using the unzip application that the server starts for you. You should extract the programs to a directory on the same name as the patch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the patch is called UP060708.zip, you should create a directory UP060708 in the Upgrade area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the patch is extracted, copy all the files from this area to their correct folders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! File Type&lt;br /&gt;
! Area&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Rpt*.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| \\{Machine}\WCSRPT$ (normally&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\Bin\Reports)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| UpdateDB.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSDB$ (normally&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*.RPX&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSRPT$ (normally&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\Bin\Reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*.exe&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS$ (normally&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*.mdb&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSDB$ (normally&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
X:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
{Machine} is the network name of the WCS Server and can be found from your system administrators.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Updating a Database Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS database sometimes changes structure, when new functionality has been added to it. In this instance, the database must be updated to be usable by the new WCS programs. The OBS team provides a utility to achieve this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The utility is available from the shortcut group WCS Utilities, and is called Update Database. The actual program run from this menu item can be seen in &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The program only need be used when either the WCS upgrade has been provided in patch form, or the client requires that the data be preserved during the upgrade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The newly provided database structure will usually be called ‘rdt1_struct.mdb’. The instructions in the previous section should ensure that this structure has already been copied to the database area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the program is started, it presents you with a screen to identify the old database, the new structure, and the new database. Browse buttons are provided to find the databases. All databases should be stored in the \Warehouse Control Server\Database area. The browse buttons should start in this area, showing you all the databases available. Should this not be the case, the process should start in the main program folder, and you should first navigate to the Database folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The old database, in our example, is called ‘rdt2.mdb’. This should be selected from the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new structure, in our example, is called ‘rdt1_struct.mdb’. This should be selected from the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new database should always be called ‘rdt1.mdb’. This should be entered in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' any data in the new database will be deleted. If you have not copied your database to a new name, as shown in this example, you will lose your data. For this reason, the program allows you to enter a different database name, other than ‘rdt1.mdb’. Check this carefully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have selected your new database, click the Update button. The program will take the data from the old database, and create it in the new database in the format of the structure database. Any errors will be shown in the window in the form. The errors will also be saved to a log file, indicated in the window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Errors should only occur if a major re-structuring of the database has taken place. In this instance, you should already have been provided details of what corrective steps to take. If now, the error log should be saved for reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this process is completed, you should have a database in the correct area, named as you chose. In our example, this would be ‘rdt1.mdb’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this is completed, the upgrade is completed. The WCS-Server can be re-started as normal. No re-boot will be required. All users, both Maintenance and RDT, can log back on to the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Semi-Automatic Upgrade ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preparations for Upgrade ===&lt;br /&gt;
An email will be received from OBS, detailing the available patches that have been delivered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Log on to the WCS Server and use Windows Explorer to navigate to the upgrades area in the Warehouse Control Server folder. This is normally one of the following or similar:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\Database\Update&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\Database\Upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\Database\Release&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Retrieve the patch from the delivery area specified in the email. Use an FTP client to retrieve the patch. Alternatively, OBS will normally have created a shortcut to a command-line FTP program in the releases area. The following are instructions on the retrieval of patches from a UNIX Server:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If there is no OBS-created shortcut:&lt;br /&gt;
** Once you have started the FTP client, log on to the machine specified. Your technical support team should have supplied you with a user name and password.&lt;br /&gt;
** Type ‘bin’.&lt;br /&gt;
** Type ‘&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;cd &amp;lt;release area&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;’, where &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;release area&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; is the place on the UNIX server where the email said the patch was released. For example, ‘cd /home/fwlsup01/mbx’&lt;br /&gt;
* Type ‘&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;get &amp;lt;patch&amp;gt;.zip&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;’, where &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;patch&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; is the upgrade file you have been informed to retrieve.&lt;br /&gt;
* When this is completed, type ‘bye’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you used the shortcut to get the patch, the patch should already be placed into the Upgrade area in the Warehouse Control Server folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are manually FTP’ing the patch, or retrieving it through some other mechanism, you should copy the patch to this area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Performing the Upgrade ===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Upgrade area and extract the patch. This is normally achieved by double-clicking the file and extracting the data using the unzip application that the server starts for you. You should extract the programs to a directory on the same name as the patch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the patch is called UP060708.zip, you should create a directory UP060708 in the Upgrade area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the patch is extracted, run the WCS_Upgrade_Install program, normally by double-clicking. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The program will inform you of what pre-release steps must be taken before you begin the installation, such as shutting down the WCS or logging of all users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The program will then install all outstanding patches in sequence, will handle back-ups of the current installation files and allow a roll-back to the last release completed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any database changes have been made or new rules added, the program will also automatically update the database for you, whilst taking a backup copy of the original database. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Should there be any issues when installing, the process will automatically roll-back the current release and write a log file. Report the problem to OBS, who will investigate the issue immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rollback ===&lt;br /&gt;
Should the patch not be acceptable for some reason, the ''previous release only'' can be rolled back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As each patch is installed, the Upgrade script makes backup copies of all the programs and data updated. Should the patch not be required, simply click on the WCS_Upgrade_Rollback shortcut. This will put the programs back to the previous settings. Additionally, if the database structure was updated in the last patch, the structure will be put back to the previous release state, but the current data will be maintained.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Backup and Resilience Guidelines =&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
Like any system, in order to provide a resilient system, backups are normally maintained. A full image backup of the WCS server is always recommended, for the case of a full server failure. In that case, the server can be rebuilt from the backup. A regular full backup is less appropriate for the WCS, for the following reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The WCS database is a proxy database, and therefore holds (mainly) transactional data, which can be re-sent from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
* The majority of the standing data can also be re-sent from the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
* The program set is relatively small and doesn’t require a large-scale back up system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, many other steps can be taken to increase the resilience of the WCS servers. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Versions of Windows may be used to generate a ‘hot swap’ – an identical PC that is activated immediately when problems occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network backups of the WCS database and programs can be done, for easy replacement if required.&lt;br /&gt;
* A UPS may be installed to increase resilience of the WCS server.&lt;br /&gt;
* Mirrored disks (of many different RAID architectures) may be put in place to reduce the possibility of disk corruption and make full system backups easier.&lt;br /&gt;
* Hot-swap disks may be used – when identical machine configurations are in use and the disks are swapped into the new machine directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* IP switching or swapping.&lt;br /&gt;
* DNS Naming – Although this doesn’t really affect resilience, this can speed up the recovery process by simply pointing the DNS name of the old WCS to the new WCS server and then starting the interface. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some assumptions are made in the following sections: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Direct IP or Host connection is used rather than DNS naming.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Backup machine has installed WCS and the latest up-to-date versions of each WCS program are in place.&lt;br /&gt;
* All network shares and drives are in place, with the same names (see section  for details).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two most common backup and resilience set-ups are discussed in the following sections. They cover regular backups of the database rather than the full program set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Backup ==&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest backup solution is to copy the database regularly to a common shared drive on your network. This will ensure that you have a copy of the latest configuration at all times. This can also be kept on a backed up drive. The key programs of the WCS installation could also be copied as part of this backup. This would not be strictly necessary, as the installation process keeps copies of the installed programs, as does the OBS release process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OBS can provide scripts for the copying of the database to a safe area of your choice. Script can also be created for the backup of the program set as well, if required. These jobs can be scheduled to run on the WCS server at prescribed intervals. OBS also provides a scheduler if one is not available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Warm Swap ==&lt;br /&gt;
The most popular backup and resilience solution is the Warm-swap, where another server PC is available to be used if necessary. The following sections outline the steps required to activate the backup WCS server in various possible situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== With Current Database ===&lt;br /&gt;
When:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scheduled or unscheduled server maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Scheduled swap-over&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-intrusive hardware fault.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure no users of WCS Maintenance are connected on to live or backup database.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure no remote desktop users are connected on to live or backup WCS Maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure all RDT users have logged off.&lt;br /&gt;
* Stop WCS Server on live machine.&lt;br /&gt;
* Copy the current WCS Database (and logging database, if present) to the backup machine’s database area.&lt;br /&gt;
* Contact OBS support to change the live WMS interface connectivity settings for the new WCS Server IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have external RDT Servers:&lt;br /&gt;
** Change the file SERVER_IP.INI to point to the new WCS Server IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Start the WMS Interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
* Start the WCS Server Process on new live server.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure the shares on any Satellite PC’s (RDT Servers or external users of WCS Maintenance) have their share information changes to point to the new WCS Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Ensure that the WCS database on the old live server is no longer capable of connecting to the live WMS, or connectivity issues may occur. This can be achieved by re-naming the old WCS database to a new name, or blanking the WCS connectivity parameters in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Without Current Database ===&lt;br /&gt;
When:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Intrusive hardware fault&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is assumed that the WCS Server on current live machine is stopped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assumes a valid database (possibly from a regular copy or from initial installation) is available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure no users of WCS Maintenance are connected on to backup database.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure no remote desktop users are connected on to backup WCS Maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure all RDT users have logged off.&lt;br /&gt;
* Contact OBS support to change the live WMS interface connectivity settings for the new WCS Server IP address, to put the WCS backup database in place and to clear down the transactional data in this new WCS database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have external RDT Servers:&lt;br /&gt;
** Change the file SERVER_IP.INI to point to the new WCS Server IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Start the WMS Interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
* Start the WCS Server Process on new live server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-send and re-set-up all standing data, if necessary. For details, see the WCS Set-up guide, referenced as item Error: Reference source not found in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-send all transactional data from WMS (or manually complete all transactional data in WMS, then start fresh).&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure the shares on any Satellite PC’s (RDT Servers or external users of WCS Maintenance) have their share information changes to point to the new WCS Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Ensure that the WCS database on the old live server is no longer capable of connecting to the live WMS, or connectivity issues may occur. This can be achieved by re-naming the old WCS database to a new name, or blanking the WCS connectivity parameters in the database. Although this process assumes that the old WCS live server is not working, this should be noted for when the machine is recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Without Any Database ===&lt;br /&gt;
Effectively, this is the same as the standard installation process (section ). However, for completeness, a summary of the steps is shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Contact OBS support to change the live WMS interface connectivity settings for the new WCS Server IP address and to create and initialize the WCS database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have external RDT Servers:&lt;br /&gt;
** Change the file SERVER_IP.INI to point to the new WCS Server IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Start the WMS Interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
* Start the WCS Server Process on new live server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Send and set-up all standing data. For details, see the WCS Set-up guide, referenced as item Error: Reference source not found in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-send all transactional data from WMS (or manually complete all transactional data in WMS, then start fresh).&lt;br /&gt;
* Ensure the shares on any Satellite PC’s (RDT Servers or external users of WCS Maintenance) have their share information changes to point to the new WCS Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Ensure that the WCS database on the old live server is no longer capable of connecting to the live WMS, or connectivity issues may occur. This can be achieved by re-naming the old WCS database to a new name, or blanking the WCS connectivity parameters in the database. Although this process assumes that the old WCS live server is not working, this should be noted for when the machine is recovered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Multi-Lingual RDT Support'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RDT application has the ability to display the screens in multiple languages. This is controlled by the regional settings on the RDT or WCS server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simply set the locale to the language you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each language to be supported, a language file must be translated for the application, and the application recompiled for this language. OBS can provide a message file to be translated upon request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The current languages supported are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* English&lt;br /&gt;
* Turkish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Installer Contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 – Full WCS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 – WCS-Server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 – WCS Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4 – RDT &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5 – DBUtils&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6 – VisData&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7 – Scheduler&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! &lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;7&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Installer&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! File&lt;br /&gt;
! Location&lt;br /&gt;
! 1&lt;br /&gt;
! 2&lt;br /&gt;
! 3&lt;br /&gt;
! 4&lt;br /&gt;
! 5&lt;br /&gt;
! 6&lt;br /&gt;
! 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Cleardown.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Compactor.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| DBUtils.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Debug.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| DoSQL.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| HowDoI2.hlp/cnt&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Initialise.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Rdt1.mdb&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\database&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDTMenu1.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptAislesTaskTimes.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptAislesTaskTimes.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptAislesWithPNDList.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptAislesWithPNDList.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptEmpList.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptEmpList.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptErrLog.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptErrLog.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptExnsByDate.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptExnsByDate.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptExnsByDateDS.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptExnsByEmp.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptExnsByEmp.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptIncomingLog.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptIncomingLog.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptLocnTruckTypes.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptLocnTruckTypes.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptOutgoingLog.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptOutgoingLog.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptPalletTypes.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptPalletTypes.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptRDTActsByDate.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptRDTActsByDate.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptRDTActsByDateDS.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptRDTActsByEmp.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RptRDTActsByEmp.rpx&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\bin\reports&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ScheduleEdit&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Scheduler&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| UpdateDB.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}\database&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| VisData.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS.hlp&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS_Async.exe&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS_SCHED.hlp/cnt&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSM3.hlp/cnt&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSMaintenance&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS-Server&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS-Server_log&lt;br /&gt;
| {}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WLEsque.dll&lt;br /&gt;
| {System}&lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| Y&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Table 5 – Installer Contents Table''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Authorising the WCS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start the authorisation program (from ''Start/Programs/WCS Utilities/WCS Authorisation''). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have been provided an authorisation code, this should be entered now. This can be achieved by using the program provided above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this program is started, it will display any authorisation codes already entered for the Server machine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should enter your provided authorisation code now. If any part of the code is invalid, you will be informed as you enter it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your code shows 0 users, un-check the Users checkbox – there is no limitation on the number of users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your code shows an IP address of 0.0.0.0, un-check the IP Address checkbox – there is no limitation on the machine the WCS can run on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your code shows an Expiration Date of 01012500, un-check the Expiration Date checkbox – there is no limitation on how long the WCS can be run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have completed entering it, press the ‘'''Check Authorisation'''’ button. If any part of the code is invalid, you will be informed of all the problems here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the code is valid, the program will duly authorise the WCS for you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' The Authorisation code may be valid, and the program may authorise for you. However, if the code has a limiting factor (for example, Expiration Date), the program will not highlight this, but the WCS will not start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Installing Wavelink StudioCOM'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step must be followed if the PC is running RDT processes on the machine. In the case where multiple RDT servers are being used, the Wavelink programs must be installed and authorised on each RDT Server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Install Wavelink'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start the Wavelink Installer package and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the installer, choose the option to start the Wavelink Administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Authorise Wavelink'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full instructions on authorising Wavelink are included in the Wavelink on-line help. Below is an extract from the help:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the Administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select Authorization from the '''Utilities''' menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Authorization dialog box appears. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Figure 2-1. '''The Authorization Dialog Box &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the name in the '''Licensee Name''' field contains the name of the organization licensing Wavelink Studio COM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this name is incorrect, type the new name in the field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select an authorization version from the '''Platform Version''' list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three authorization versions available: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
#* '''Wavelink Studio NT/95'''. Select this version if you are installing Wavelink Studio for the first time. &lt;br /&gt;
#* '''Wavelink Studio User Pack'''. Select this version if you are adding to your current Wavelink Studio user base. &lt;br /&gt;
#* '''Wavelink Studio Roaming 10-day User Pack'''. Select this version if you are only temporarily adding to your current Wavelink Studio COM user base. &lt;br /&gt;
# Type the serial number for your copy of Wavelink Studio COM in the '''Serial Number''' field.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type the total number of authorized Wavelink Studio COM users in the '''User Limit''' field.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type the authorization code in the '''Authorization''' field.&lt;br /&gt;
# Type the expiration date for the authorization code in the '''Expiration Date''' field.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Once you click OK, the Total Users field displays the total number of concurrent Wavelink Studio COM users your system supports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the authorisation has been entered, the Wavelink programs are ready to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Check Services'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ensure that the Wavelink services have been added (on NT-based machines – 95-based machines will add to start-up items in the Start menu)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ensure that the services are started. By default, the services will not have started, as they will not work without a valid authorisation code. To start the services either:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the Services option of the Administrative tools on the Start menu;&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-boot the machine&lt;br /&gt;
* Start them manually by double-clicking on the Services themselves. They can be found (by default) at C:\Program Files\Wavelink\StudioCOM\bin and are called WLServer.exe and WLStartup.exe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 2 services are called:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* WavelinkServer&lt;br /&gt;
* WavelinkStartupSrvc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Configure Wavelink'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complete instructions for configuring Wavelink are available in the on-line help on the Wavelink start menu group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For our purposes, the set-up can be quite simple.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
*# First, ensure Wavelink Administrator is started.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Click on ''New Server Connection''.&lt;br /&gt;
*# From the popup window, choose to connect to the local host. If a popup box appears asking you to start the service, some of the previous steps have not been completed successfully. Check again.&lt;br /&gt;
*# If the connection is successful, the administrator should show a TCP/IP network item in the explorer.&lt;br /&gt;
*# In order to run RDT applications on Wavelink, a Wavelink Monitor must be set up. To do this, click the ''‘New Wavelink Monitor’ ''button on the toolbar, or choose the appropriate option from the ''‘Network Configuration’ ''menu. You will be shown a ‘New Wavelink Monitor’ wizard.&lt;br /&gt;
*# On the first screen, choose ''‘TCP/IP Network’ ''and then click the ‘Next’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
*# On the second screen, choose a port number for the monitor. This can be randomly chosen, but Wavelink suggests numbers for you. Normally 1000 or 2000 are good numbers to choose, but anything above 1000 and less than 30000 will probably be acceptable. Click the ‘Next’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
*# On the third screen, choose the application to be run using the browse button. You should choose the main RDT application RDTMenu1.exe. This is by default in the folder ‘C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server’. Ensure that the ‘Reset monitor upon server startup’ option is checked. Click the ‘Next’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
*# On the final screen, you have an opportunity to enter Discovery Tokens for the monitor. These are for use when several Wavelink monitors are available on your network. In most normal situations, at least two will be enabled (a test server and a live server), so you should ensure you enter some recognisable (but short) text here. &lt;br /&gt;
*# A fuller explanation of Wavelink Discovery Tokens is available in the Wavelink online help.&lt;br /&gt;
*# Click the ‘Finish’ button. This will create the new monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, any RDTs loaded with the Wavelink client application will be able to choose the Wavelink monitor from a pop-up menu on the RDT when they connect. When they do, the RDT will then load the WCS RDT application. Instructions on how to load the Wavelink client are in the next appendix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Optional Set-up'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the RDT/WCS server PC is set up so that the password changes rarely, a further modification to the Services can be done. This is to allow the PC to interact better with the services, and allow external users to stop rogue processes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, you need access to the Administrative tools section of the Settings Start menu item. The Services option should be chosen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once chosen, find the two services, named:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* WavelinkServer&lt;br /&gt;
* WavelinkStartupSrvc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each of them, right-click on them and choose properties, or choose the appropriate option from the ''‘Action’ ''menu. A Properties screen should be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this screen, click the ''‘Log On’'' tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the option ''‘Log on as this account’''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the required user-name and password in the appropriate boxes. The username should be set up as {workgroup}\{username}. Click the ‘OK’ button on this form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not get this set-up correct, the Wavelink services will not start properly. If the password is changed, the Wavelink services will not start properly. This will result in an inability to use the RDTs in the warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Installing Wavelink Client'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use the WCS on an RDT, the RDT must have the Wavelink client loaded onto it. This is achieved in many ways, depending on the type of unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''DOS-based UNITS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is achieved using the Wavelink Avalanche software. Full instructions on how to use this software are included with the software itself. However, the following is a reasonably simple list of instructions that should help guide you through the necessary steps to configure an RDT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first step is to load and configure Wavelink Avalanche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Load Avalanche on the PC – simply follow the instructions in the installer, accepting any defaults.&lt;br /&gt;
# Start the Avalanche Manager. &lt;br /&gt;
# Start the Avalanche monitors/services (by clicking the green button).&lt;br /&gt;
# Open out the file list part of the display so you can see 'Software Collections' and 'Network Profiles'. &lt;br /&gt;
# Create new software collection by right-clicking on the appropriate item. Give it a meaningful name. &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose ''Software Management/Install Software Package ''from the menu. Find your *.AVA file. The WCS installation CD contains the zip file for Symbol 3000-variant terminals - this is the recommended one for PDT68XX terminals. &lt;br /&gt;
# Right-click on new file list item 'Symbol 3K' (if using the AVA file provided – if another is used, this text description will be different). Choose ''Configure Package/Client ''from the menu. Enter your Wavelink settings here, and use the File menu to save. The Wavelink settings entered here will consist of the Discovery settings set up in the previous section. Right click on the same item and choose 'Enable'. &lt;br /&gt;
# Right-click on ‘Network Profiles' and choose to create a new one. Give it a meaningful name. &lt;br /&gt;
# Right-click on new network profile, and choose ''Settings''. Set up your wireless and wired network settings here. Assign an IP address to the IP Address pool for each RDT you want using the system. &lt;br /&gt;
# Right-click and choose ''Enable profile.''&lt;br /&gt;
# Right-click and choose ''Set as Default Profile''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that Avalanche has been prepared, each terminal must now be configured individually, by first loading the Avalanche client, then letting Avalanche configure the terminal automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug your cable into the PC and comms cradle. Put the RDT in the cradle. &lt;br /&gt;
# Boot the RDT into command mode (a list of common boot sequences for RDTs is provided in the Wavelink documentation), and choose ''Program Loader''. Erase the current EPROM (What is on the terminal will be lost) &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose ''Tools/Download HEX files'' from the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the hex file 'WLEnabler_S3K_DO_8B_1_63_00.hex' from the explorer window. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set the RDT settings to those defaulted on the PC screen. Hit ENTER on the RDT unit. Click Download on the PC. &lt;br /&gt;
# When finished, the RDT should display status '00'. If not, something has gone wrong - try again. &lt;br /&gt;
# Once loaded, leave the unit in the cradle and cold-boot the terminal. Follow all instructions on the RDT and&amp;amp;nbsp;the Wavelink Studio client should be automatically installed for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 3000 series mobile device is any Symbol mobile device which relies on a hex image for its initial software download. The actual model numbers are 1xxx, 3xxx, and 6xxx, where each x denotes a digit in the model number. Some example model numbers are 1040, 3840, and 6940. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To install the Enabler on a Series 3000 device: '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Boot the mobile device into Command Mode, according to the directions in table 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | '''Table 2: '''Command Mode Boot Sequences &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Device Type '''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Command Mode Boot Sequence '''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 46-key LRT 3840 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
46-key PDT 3140 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
47-key PDT 3540 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
46-key PDT 6840 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
46-key PDT 6140 &lt;br /&gt;
| Power off the mobile device. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hold F+I. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press and release PWR. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Release F+I. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 54-key VRC 3940 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
54-key VRC 6940 &lt;br /&gt;
| Power off the mobile device. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hold A+D. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press and release ON/OFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Release A+D. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 35-key PDT 6140 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
35-key PDT 3140 &lt;br /&gt;
| Power off the mobile device. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hold BKSP+SHIFT. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press and release ON/OFF. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Release BKSP+SHIFT. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 27-key WSS 1040 &lt;br /&gt;
| Power off the mobile device. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hold FUNC+ENTER. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press and release PWR. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Release FUNC+ENTER. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the up arrow and down arrow keys to select the Program loader function. &lt;br /&gt;
# Place the mobile device in the cradle.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press ENTER. The Program Loader screen appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figure 20. Program Loader EEPROM Erase &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press ENTER to erase the non-volatile memory. The Comm Parameters screen appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figure 21. Program Loader Baud Parameter &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the Up Arrow/Down Arrow to select the communication parameters. Press ENTER at the end of the selection to accept the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; | '''Table 3: '''Download Communication Parameters &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Parameter '''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Value '''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Baud &lt;br /&gt;
| 38400 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Data Bits &lt;br /&gt;
| 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Parity &lt;br /&gt;
| None &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Flow Control &lt;br /&gt;
| None &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The Comm Parameters screen appears. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figure 22. Program Loader - Comm Parameters &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' If the cradle supports multiple mobile devices, prepare each in the same manner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press ENTER on the mobile device. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Program Loader–Receiving screen appears and the mobile device is now ready to download the Enabler. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Verify that a COM port is available for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check the status on a COM port, double-click the COM port in the Tree View and read the information that appears in the Status branch. The status for an available COM port is Listening. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the Avalanche Manager Agent did not automatically detect the COM ports during the installation, see [../../../../../Program%20Files/Wavelink/Avalanche/Help/Configuring_Serial_Ports.html#wp1080508 Managing Serial Ports ]before attempting a serial download. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' COM ports used by other software programs or hardware peripherals should be removed from the list of available serial ports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' The Avalanche Manager Agent must reside on the system with the serial port connections. However, you can manage the Agent either from a local or remote Management Console. To manage the Agent from a remote console, you must connect to the Agent from the console using a routable IP address. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Download the Enabler using the HEX file download utility included with the Avalanche Manager. See [../../../../../Program%20Files/Wavelink/Avalanche/Help/Downloading_Hex_Files.html#wp1044776 Downloading Hex Files ]for more instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the files have been downloaded, a 3000 Series device indicates a successful file transfer with status code 0000. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Windows Mobile/CE/PocketPC'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is achieved using the Microsoft ActiveSync software and a communications cradle for your RF unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, the Wavelink Client ActiveSync installer should be available, either provided by OBS or downloaded from the Wavelink website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full instructions for installing and using the latest client are available from the Wavelink website. However, the following is a simplified extract of the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Before you can install the client, verify that you are connected to the mobile device with Microsoft ActiveSync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To install the Wavelink Client:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1 '''Place the mobile device in its docking cradle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2 '''Download the correct installation file to your host computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;The name of the file is wlc_s90_cenet_all_5&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;''xxxx''&amp;gt;_us_n_as.exe, where ''xxxx ''is the client version number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file is a self-extracting ZIP file that contains all the necessary files for the Wavelink Client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3 '''Extract the ZIP file to a directory of your choice. Double-click the ZIP file to extract it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4 '''Within the extracted files, locate the file named wlc_s9k_soft_5xxxx_wce410_armv4_Install.exe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''5 '''Double-click the specified file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ''Welcome ''dialog box appears, introducing you to the Wavelink Client installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''6 '''Click Next. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The setup program installs the Wavelink Client to the desktop. A message box appears (Figure 1) asking whether you want to install the client to the default application install directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Figure 1. '''''The Installing Applications Dialog Box''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''7 '''Click No. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note: '''If you click Yes in this dialog box, you can immediately install the Wavelink Client, but the client will not persist on the device after the next cold boot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you click No, the Select Destination Media dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Figure 2. '''''The Select Destination Media Dialog Box''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''8 '''Select Application from the '''Save In '''drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''9 '''Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Microsoft ActiveSync automatically begins to download the Wavelink Client to the device. After the download is complete, a dialog box appears, requesting that you check your mobile device to see whether additional steps are necessary to install the Wavelink Client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''10 '''On the mobile device, perform any additional installation steps, if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''11 '''In ActiveSync, click OK to complete the download process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ''Setup Complete ''dialog box appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''12 '''In ActiveSync, click Finish to complete the installation process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Start Menu Shortcut tables'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Menu Item'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Program'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Server&lt;br /&gt;
| wcs-server.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Server (Full Logging)&lt;br /&gt;
| wcs-server_log.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Help&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS.HLP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSmaintenance.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Maintenance Help&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSM3.HLP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Scheduler&lt;br /&gt;
| ScheduleEdit.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Scheduler Help&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS_SCHED.HLP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| How Do I... Help&lt;br /&gt;
| HOWDOI2.HLP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Table 6 – Group ‘Warehouse Control Server’ shortcuts''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Menu Item'''&lt;br /&gt;
| '''Program '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Database Utilities&lt;br /&gt;
| DBUtils.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RDT Debug Process&lt;br /&gt;
| Debug.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Update Database&lt;br /&gt;
| UpdateDB.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Compact Database&lt;br /&gt;
| Compactor.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Initialise Database&lt;br /&gt;
| Initialise.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| WCS Authorisation&lt;br /&gt;
| WCSAuthorisation.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| VisData&lt;br /&gt;
| VisData.exe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Help&lt;br /&gt;
| Help.txt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Table 7 – Group ‘WCS Utilities’ shortcuts''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Using Debug RDT system'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCS comes with a testing tool that allows you to run RDT users from your PC, rather than changing the configuration of the RDTs themselves. This program is called Debug, and can be found on the WCS Utilities Start menu group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Running the Debug process'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, ensure that the Debug option is installed on your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start the Debug process (using the Start menu option ''‘RDT Debug Process’ ''on the ‘WCS Utilities’ group).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be shown a dialogue box, asking you to select an RDT. All RDTs have an in-build RDT Code. For normal RDTs, that would be the IP Address. This feature allows you to emulate this by entering IP addresses here. Alternatively, you can enter any unique reference you like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDT Codes you have entered before will be available, along with any settings you have set up for them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have entered or chosen an RDT, you will be shown a settings screen, containing the following elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Screen Size – the most common screen sizes are set up for you here in an option box. Simply select the one you want. 21*16 is the most common RDT screen size.&lt;br /&gt;
* Colours – this allows you to choose the foreground and background colours the debug process uses to render the RDT screen window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Font Size – defines the ultimate size of the window by allowing you to change the size of the fixed-width font used to display the RDT screen. Font size 18 gives you a very readable window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have set up the process how you like it, click OK. All settings will be saved against the RDT code you selected earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Using the Debug process'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The debug process can now be used much like an RDT. However, you do not have a scanner attached to the device. The Debug process allows you to emulate a scanner using the menu item labelled initially as ''‘Keyboard’''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option changes your entry-mode from keyboard to scanner emulation. Choose the barcode type you require from the expandable menu. When you next key in data, it will be as if you scanned the items instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can switch between keyboard and scanner emulation by pressing CTRL-K at any time. You can change the emulated barcode type at any time by selecting a different code type from the menu. Pressing CTRL-K without picking a barcode type will do nothing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The debug process displays errors and message boxes in a pop-up box on the PC screen. This is simply to allow the process to pause at this point. Boxes can be cleared by pressing Escape or Enter or clicking the OK button on the pop-up box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can’t exit the Debug process by closing the PC window – you must exit the application normally, exiting from the main menu by pressing the Escape key, followed by the Enter key. In the RDT Debug application, the Escape key is the equivalent of the Clear key on an RDT. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further documentation about the exact functions available in the OBS RDT Application is available elsewhere, referenced as item Error: Reference source not found in Error: Reference source not found&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Advanced Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Debug process can be used remotely, in the same way that RDT processes can be installed remotely (see section ). The file ‘SERVER_IP.INI’ must be modified to contain the WCS Server’s IP address and WCS-RDT port number. This port number can be found through WCS Maintenance from the ‘System Settings’ option, or alternatively through the Initialise Database application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file should have contents similar to the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“127.0.0.1”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“15002”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first item in the file should be the WCS Server PC’s IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second item should be the WCS-RDT port number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Other Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
## '''Scheduler'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some processes are available in the WCS for Scheduling. As certain versions of Windows have easily usable scheduler, or was written. The installer is available on the disk, along with the help required to use it. Scheduler is also installed as part of the Full WCS Installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schedulable items are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Compactor – requests the WCS Server to compact the database. This can only occur if the WCS Server has exclusive access to the WCS database. If there are Maintenance users connected to the WCS database, the database will not be compacted.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cleardown – starts a process to clear historical data from the WCS. This can be started with many parameters. However, if Maintenance is installed on the PC, the item can use the settings set up from there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''DBUtils'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a data manipulation utility, allowing OBS to manipulate the data directly on the database. This tool should not be used unless trained in its use. There is a separate installer for DBUtils on the installation disk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' WCSS and Full WCS installers all install the DBUtils application. Although set-up of each individual user can stop the use of this process through the Maintenance application, there is no way to stop the users simply clicking on the application itself. If this is seen as a security risk, DBUtils should be removed from the application directory, the default for this being ‘C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a WCS Maintenance user requires access to DBUtils from Maintenance, simply install the program using the appropriate installation program.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''VisData'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VisData is a sophisticated database management utility. It is for support only. It may be installed on the WCS Server machine only, for OBS support purposes. As a support tool, VisData is being modified constantly to provide us with more tools to help support you. The installer is included here in the event that this program is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Upgrade Install Package'''&lt;br /&gt;
## '''Installation and Setup Instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following are instructions on the set-up of the Semi-Automatic Upgrade Install package.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a directory under the WCS Database area (\\{server}\WCSDB$ or {Install Directory}\Database), called Upgrades.&lt;br /&gt;
# Extract the files in the zip here.&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the file UpdateDB.exe to the WCS Database area.&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the Install.DAT file so that the logical areas point to the right place on the machine:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upgrade- the directory created above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCSDB- {Install Directory}\Database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCSAPP- {Install Directory}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCSRPT- {Install Directory}\bin\Reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCSRDT- {Install Directory}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a shortcut (or change the provided one) for WCS_Upgrade_Rollback. This should point to the WCS_Upgrade_Install VB script, and should start in the same directory.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure that there are NO zip files in this directory, other than those that you want installing by the script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
## '''Sample Install.DAT File'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upgrade=C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\Database\Upgrades&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCSDB=C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\Database\&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCSAPP=C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCSRPT=C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\Bin\Reports\&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCSRDT=C:\Program Files\Warehouse Control Server\&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be extended with several WCSRDT entries, to support multiple RDT servers, if necessary.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=2</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/WCS/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=2"/>
		<updated>2009-05-13T11:54:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Admin: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[Installation Guide]]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[Set-up Guide]]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[WCS Maintenance]]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[RDT Functionality]]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[Using WCS from WMS]]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;[[External Data Access]]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Admin</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>